下面小编给大家整理的高二英语教案学案一体化 unit 3(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)，本文共12篇，欢迎阅读与借鉴!
篇1：高二英语教案学案一体化 unit 3(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
教学目的和要求
课程标准要求掌握的项目
目
标 1．Talking about and architecture
2．Talking about architects and their works
3．Talking about works ofaIt
4．Talking about preferences
词
汇
architecture architect preference design furniture taste sofa honey modem convenient block apartment style old-styled stand passage ugly construct construction steelconcrete impress roof balcony fantastic create seashell sail stadium net nest belong
paint aside rent development
功
能
句
式
偏爱(Preference)
I'd rather… I wouldn't feel happy if…
I prefer something that．．． I’m much more interested in…
I'm not very interested in… I like seeing something．．．
In my opinion… I don't get very excited about…
What I like is… I really prefer…
If Vou ask me．then… I Can't stand…
语
法
过去分词(短语)作宾语补足语
We noticed the mailbag carried onto the train．
Everyone was surprised t0 see the buildings∥nished so soon．
Please keep me informed oj how things are going．
They weFe happy to hear the work alrea匆如.
课文听力
S:Can I help you? what is it you are looking for? Furniture
for the bedroom, the kitchen or the living room?
D: We're looking for a fewthings, but we aren't very sure yet. We bought a new flat, and we already have some furniture, but the new house is so big. We can use a few more things, and perhaps replace some very old pieces.
A: I think we need a kitchen table, one that is large enough to have dinner with five or six people.
S: Very well. Ifyou would like something modern, I suggest you think of something like this. The legs of the table are silver coloured while the table top is made of thick glass. Very beautiful and very easy to clean.
D: Yes, I really like that.
A: No. 1 don't like such cold and hard things. I think a table made of wood would look much nicer. Wood is warm, and makes you feel comfortable.
D: Honey, I knowyou like that, but I'm afraid it'll be too expensive.
S: That's no problem. I can show you some really nice modern tables that look as if they were made of wood.
A: Great! We are also looking for something on the wall. There's a big piece of white wall over the sofa.
S: Were you thinking of a painting or perhaps a poster or something ...
D: Yes. Could you show us something?
S: Something classical?
A: Oh, no. You can show us something modern. I like classical things in the kitchen and the bedroom, but our living room is quite modern, isn't it, Danny?
D: By the way, we are also still looking for two comfortable chairs, something modern and classic at the same time. Would you have anything like that?
S: Oh dear! Oh dear! What do you mean by that?
A: Well, something classic and fine but also cool, you know.
Answers to Exercise 1:
kitchen table, wooden tables
Answers to Exercise 2:
True: 4, 5
Answers to Exercise 3:
1 things, replace, pieces 2 wood, would
3 warm, comfortable 4 wall, sofa
5 something moderm
课后听力
The history of architecture in China and most European countries is very different. As a result, the way people look at art and architecture has also developed along different lines.
Much of China's ancient architecture was constructed of wood. Only the Great Wall and city walls were made of large bricks. Earthquakes have occurred quite often in China's history. Besides that, many temples were destroyed by fire. Sometimes the fires were caused by accident. However, it also happened that emperors would destroy temples and architecture that were built in the past. They wanted to get rid of all architecture that reminded people of the former emperor. After burning the old temples and palaces, the emperor would have everything built new in the style that he preferred. That's why all over China we find many temples that were
rebuilt or restored about 250 to 300 years ago, during the age of Qianlong. Few temples are left over from earlier times.
Much of Europe's ancient architecture is 300 to 1,000 years old. Architects used natural materials, such as stone and brick to construct their buildings. There weren't many earthquakes, and unlike China, European kings would usually not bum the churches and other architecture built before their time. They constructed new buildings in the style they preferred at other places.
Wood is not a very strong material. Weather conditions make repairs necessary and by the end of about-100 years usually every part of a wooden construction has been replaced. So, although the design can be hundreds of years old, every part of the building may have been made less than a hundred years ago. Stone and brick are strong enough to stand the test of time. These materials do not need to be replaced. So when looking at old buildings in Europe, we are actually looking at what was built many centuries ago. While in China the architecture may be old, what we look at is in fact quite new.
语篇领悟
阅读本单元课文，完成下列各题
(Passage 1 )
1. Why did architects in the 1920's want their buildings un-natural?
A. They didn't like traditional architecture style.
B. They wanted to change people's feelings of beauty.
C. They didn't like building materials such as earth,stone, brick and wood.
D. They like buildings materials such as steel, glass and concrete.
2. In what ways is ancient architecture different from mod-ern architecture?
A. materials, shapes B. roofs, corners
C. size, height D. balconies, windows
3. Which of the following belongs to modern architecture?
A. Taihe Dian.
B. The Temple of Heaven.
C. The Opera House is Sydney.
D. The great European Cathedrals.
(Passage 2)
4. Old buildings are pulled down because
A. they are too small
B. they are too old
C. they are of no use any more
D. people don't like them any more
5. Factory 798 was designed by
A. Germans B. Russians
C. Germans and Russians D. Chinese and Russians
6. Which is NoT the benefit for people working in an old
factory building?
A. The rent is low.
B. It is convenient for artists to make large objects.
C. It is fairly quiet there.
D. People can visit there.
主旨大意
7.Which of the following best expresses the main idea of Passage 1 ?
A. Ancient architecture is popular.
B. Modern architecture is popular.
C. Ancient buildings look more beautiful than modern ones.
D. Different times,different styles of architecture.
8. Which of the following best expresses the main idea of Passag2?
A. Factory 798 is of great value in modern times.
B. People should save architecture from the past.
C. People should build more factories like Factory 798.
D. People shouldn't pull down old buildings.
推理判断
9．From Passage 1 we can infer that
A. the writer prefers ancient buildings to modern ones
B. the writer prefers traditional materials to modern ones
C. the writer doesn't like modern architects at all
D. the writer prefers buildings which look nature that look unnature.
10. From Passage 2 we can infer that
A. Factory 798 was out of use for long
B. people rent Factory 798 because of his German building style
C. in many large cities, people build many factories like factory 798
D. old buildings can be only used as art centres
知识点
1． prefer喜欢；偏好；宁愿(后接名词或代词、不定式、动名词、不定式复合结构、接从句)
Which would you prefer , tea or coffee?
茶和咖啡你喜欢哪一种?
I prefer coffee．我更喜欢咖啡。
Jeffenson preferred to go and see in the people．
杰斐逊喜欢到人民中间去调查走访。
Our families preferred going out west to celebrate
American 200 birthday．
我们全家人宁愿去西部旅行庆祝美国200周年庆典。
I prefer you to stay here with me．
我愿意让你和我一起住在这儿。
I prefer that you can phone me as soon as you arrive at your home．
我更愿意你一到家就给我打电话。
l prefer science to languages．
我喜欢理科而不喜欢文科。
I prefer reading to watching TV．
与看电视相比我更喜欢阅读。
He preferred to die rather than give in． 他宁死不屈 =Rather than give in，he preferred to die．
[考题1] (1)Rather than on a crowded bus,
he always prefers _____ bicyele．(全国高考题)
A．ride：ride B．riding；ride
C．ride；to ride D．t0 ride；riding
[解析] 分析句子结构可知，本题考查prefer to do sth．rather than do sth．的句型用法.该结构中可以将rather than do sth．提前至句首以予强调。[答案] C
(2)一Which would you prefer ，tea 0r coffee?
I'm not thirsty．Thanks anyway．
A．better；Neither B．best；Both
C．more；None D．不填；Neinler
[解析]prefer的含义为like doing sth else better，释义中已含有比较级的意味，因此在实际运用中，不再与比较或最高级连用；从答语的“不口渴”，可知，无论是茶还是咖啡，都不想品尝，因此否定两者用neither，而用来否定三者或以上的副词要用none。[答案] D
2．impress压出印记；印上；给……留下印象；强调
He impressed the pot with his seal．
他把他的印记印在罐子上.
The book didnt’impress me at a11．
这本书没有给我留下一点印象。
She impressed me as being very rude．
她给我的印象是十分粗鲁。
He impressed me with the importance of the work．
他让我明白了工作的重要性。
His first speech as president made a strong impression on his audience．他当主席后的第一次演讲给听众留下了深刻的印象。
[考题2] (1)The speech by the mayor of Shanghaii before the final
voting for EXPO 20lO is strongly impressed my memory．
A．t0 B．over C．by D．0n (上海春季高考题)
[解析] 句意表示“上海市的市长为争取世博会的演讲给我留下了极为深刻的印象.”所缺介词与impress组成“给……留下印象”讲，介词用on，为习惯表达。[答案] D
(2)He--a design on cloth．。
A．pressed B．impressed C．put D．placed
[解析] 句意表示“把设计图案印制在布上”，而press表示“按，压”不合题意。C、D两项只表示“放置”，也不合题意.[答案] B
3． creation J1．创造
creature n．生命；生物
Man creates himself.人类创造了他本身。
Shakespeare created many comic characters．
莎士比亚创造了许多喜剧人物。
That would create a wrong impression．
那会造成一个错误的印象。
Her new dress created much excitement．
她的新衣引起了极大兴奋。
[考题3] It is the people who history
A．create B．invent C．discover D．find
[解析] 易排除c、D两项，因为本题不是考查“找寻”的用法，而是考查“创造”。create指从无到有，从粗糙的原料到完美的产品，既可用于具体事物，也可用于抽象的事物；invent指经过研究，实验等手段设计或创造出前所未有的东西，常用于具体的东西。本句话的含义为“创造历史的正是人民大众。”[答案]A
4．fill up填写；斟满；占掉(时间)；淤积
I want you to fill up this form.我要你填这张表。
Fill up the cask with hot water． 请把热水瓶灌满开水。
I filled the room up with furniture. 我把房间装满家具。
The theatre filled up rapidly．剧院很快坐满人。
Ihe gutter has filled up with mud． 沟槽里都是泥。
[考题4]Seeing her lovely daughter running towards her，the young mothers heart tenderness and happiness．
A．was filled 0f B．Was full with
C．Was filled with D．was full by
[解析] 本题考查“充满”的表达，除了用be filled with外，还可以用be full 0f。因为均是习语，所以不可更改两个词组的任何部分。
[答案] C
5.stick贴、粘；插、扎；卡住、陷在……里；伸出；突出，n．棍 子 .手杖
stick to坚持(真理、作法等)；坚持干(某事)
He stuck a needle in my arm． 他把针扎进我的胳膊里。
The key has stuck in the lock．钥匙卡在锁里了。
I stick to what I said/the truth.我坚持我所说的／真理。
[考题5]He had a great idea that one should whatever one had begun．
A．insist on B．stick to C．stick out D．stick with
[解析] 本题既考查了insist on与同义词sitck to的区别，又兼顾了stick out／with的用法。insist on后一般接v一ing形式，表示“坚持做某事”，很少直接接名词或从句。stick out意为“伸出；坚持到底(vi)”，stick with意为“和……在一起；扎／刺”，二者均不符合题意。 [答案]B
6．set aside存储；放在一边；取消(=put away)
Each week he tried to set aside a few dollars 0f his salary．
每周他尽量从薪水中省下几块钱。
My objections were set aside．
我的反对无人理会。
Peter set aside the papers and reached for his cigarettes and matehes．彼得把文件放在一边拿起了火柴。
[考题6] It is wise to have some money for old age．
A．put away B．kept up
C．given away D．1aid out (全国高考题)
[解析] 本题测试具体语境中动词的运用问题。keep up有“保
持下去”之意，give away表示“免费赠送；分发”，lay out表示“花费，使用”，均不符合语境体现出来的“为年老而存钱”。[答案]A
7．share分享；分担；合用；共同具有 n.一份；一份责任、功劳；股票
We need friends to share happiness and sorrow．
我们需要朋友分享幸福，分担悲伤，。
Those chestnuts smeⅡgood．Let’s share them．
那些栗子闻起来真香，咱们一起吃咆。
Everyone in the house shares the bathroom．
这所房子的人合用一个浴室。
We all take an equal share．
我们都分到了均等的一份。
[考题7]Let Harry play with your toys as well，Clare - you must learn to ．
A．support B．care C．spare D．share (高考题)
[解析] support表示“支持；阐述；赡养”，care表示“关怀；在乎”，spare表示“抽出，均出”，均不符合语境所体现的“克劳尔，让亨利一起同你分享玩具玩”。本题考查从具体语境中选择词汇的用法。[答案] D
8．taste的用法
作名词讲时。有“味道；爱好；鉴赏力，品味”等意。
作形容词讲时，有“有吸引力的；经精心挑选”的意思。
作动词讲时，有“尝，品尝”之意。
I don't 1ike the taste 0fthis coffee．
我不喜欢这杯咖啡的味道。
She has developed a taste for modern art．
她渐渐培养出对现代艺术的爱好。
The fumiture Was very tasteful．
家具十分雅致。
Can I taste a piece 0f that cheese t0 see what it’slike?
我可以尝一尝那块干酪的味道吗?
引申：(be)in bad taste指举止言谈粗俗；失当。
Some 0f his comments were in bad taste．
Tasteless akj.庸俗；没味道；不得体
Tasty adj.(tastier，tastiest)美味
have a taste 0f sth．有……的味道
The pudding has a taste 0foranges．那布丁带有橙味
[考题8](1)The oranges taste ________
A．well B．good C．badly D．wonderfully
[解析】 “尝起来”，taste后应跟形容词作表语。[答案] B
(2)Pop music is liked by many poople,but it is not_____everyone's taste．
A．with B．in C．on D．to
[解析] “适合某人的口味”应为短语to one's taste。[答案] D
(3)The cook______the soup．It_______delicious．
A．tasted；tasted B．is tasted；is tasted
C．tasted；was tasted D．i8 tasted；tastes
[解析] 分析句子结构及用法可知，第一空测试taste作为实义动词的用法，含义为“品尝（某食物）”，是个及物动词；第二空因为有句未形容词delicious ，所以taste此时“摇身一变”，变成了连系动词，表示“尝起来”，后接形容词作表语，无被动式。
9．convenient adj．方便。便利的
I’m willing to meet you on any day that is convenient for you．
我乐意在你方便的任何日期与你相见。
[考题9] Come over and have a chat witlI me whenever_______ ．
A．you will be convenient B．it wiU be convenient to you
C．you are convenient D．it is convenient to you
[解析] It is+adj.for sb．／sth．to do sth．为固定词组。类似于
convenient用法的还有necessary、national、important、impossible等等，这些形容词都是用来说明做某些事的特点，因而不可用人作主语，而应用于上述句型当中。[答案]D
10．复合形容词的构成
(1)数词+名词，数词+名词-ed或数词+名词+单数+形容词
a ten-speed bieyele 十速自行车
(2)形容词+名词
a full-timejob 专职工作
(3)名词+现在分词
Englingh-speaking countries 讲英语的国家
(4)形容词+现在分词
an ordinary-looking girl. 相貌一般的女孩
(5)名词+过去分词
a man-made satellite 人造卫星
(6)副词+现在分词
hard-working people 勤劳的人们
(7)副词+过去分词
a well-known doctor 著名医生
[考题10](1)The village is far away from here indeed．It’s_____
walk．
A．a four hour B．a four hour’s
c．a four-hours D．a four hours’(上海高考题)
[解析] “四小时的路程”有两种表达：a four hours’walk和a
four-hour walk。[答案]D
(2)His job is t0 sell the______carvings(雕)in the______ department 0f the company(湖北省部分重点中学联考题)
A．Wooden； sales B．wood；sales
C．Wood；sale D．wooden；sale
[解析]在Wood与carve之间存在动宾关系：所以形成构词法时，用“名词+ V．-ing'’形式，即wood carving；表示“销售”时。作定语要用sales。[答案] B
11．表示“忍受”的三个词(组)
它们是stand、bear与put up with。
He cannot titand criticism．他受不了批评。
It will stand firing up to 1300℃．它可以经受住高达1300度的度。
If I were you I wonldn't put up with his behaviour any 1onger．
如果我是你，我将再也忍受不了他的行为。
I can't bear the pain／my brother／this weather．
我受不了这苦痛／我的弟弟／这种天气。
[考题11] --Mum，it is nice weather．I want to skate this afternoon．(--20海淀区期中练习题)
--Don't you think the ice on the lake is too thin to____your weight?
A．stand B．bear C．catch D．take
[解析] 儿子想去滑冰，母亲担心冰层太薄，承受不住儿子的重量。所缺词表示“承担；承受……重量／负彬东西”等，应用bear。
stand常用于人，指面对痛苦、艰难、侮辱等不畏缩后退，bear指能忍受磨难、冷静地面对现实，强调容忍的能力，常用于口语，常可与put up will连用。[答案] B
12．表示“瞟；望”的三个词组
(1)glance，指“很快地望一望，看一眼”，多与at连用。
He glanced at tlle envelope and reeognized his ather’s handwriting．
他看了一下信封就认出来了他父亲的笔迹。
I glanced around／abou∥round the room．
我向屋子里四处看了看。
(2)stare表示目不转晴地长时间的“注视”；
(3)glare表示怒气冲冲地“盯着”，二者一般都与at连用。
The two fighters glared at eaeh other．
两位斗士恶狠狠地盯着对方。
Robinson stared at the footprints．full 0f fear．
鲁滨逊盯着脚印看，心里充满了恐惧。
[考题12](1)一Do you like________in public?
一I don't think so．It makes me nervous．
A．to be glared B．being stared
C．to be 100ked D．being stared at
[解析] 表示“盯、看”时，后一般要接介词at，所以A、B项排除。c项中的1ook为不及物动词，本身就没有被动式，也被排除。句意为“你喜欢在大庭广众之下被人盯着看吗?”[答案]D
(2)The two men stood____angrily at each other，while the crowd
loeked on with amusement．
A．staring B．daring C．dancing D．seeing
[解析] 三个同义词中，只有glare可以与表示感情的词连用。本题中含有angrily，所以用glare。[答案]B
13．如何“举例子”
take．．．for example举……为一个例子
for example(=for instance)例如
Such as(=like)比如／诸如
and so on等等(进行概括，不一一列举)
Chadie’s early films，such as(=like)City Lights，are well received．
Take Xiao Wang(for example)．举小王为例。
=Take Xiao Wang(for instanee)．
[考题13] There are several people interested in your new plan，
__________Mr Jones and Dr Simpson．
A．that is B．for an example C．1ike D．included
[解析]that is作插入语，含义为“也就是说”，不用来举例子；for example是习惯用法，中间的an因为习惯而要省略；include含义为“包含”，也不用来举例，用来表示附加说明，而且放在名词前面时要用including，放在名词后面时才用included。[答案] c
14．1ook at与1ook after的次常见含义
look at (1)（彻底）检查 (2)考虑，研究
(3) 认为 (4)读；阅读
My tooth aches，I think a dentist shotlld 1ook at it．
我牙痛，想找牙医检查一下。
The government is looking at ways of reducing the number of stray dogs．
政府正研究减少野狗数目的方法。
Different races and nation-alities 1ook at life differendIy．
不同种族和国籍的人对生命都有不同的看法。
look after负责某事物
our neighbours are looking after the garden while
we are away
我们不在家的时候，由邻居照料花园。
[考题14](1)r11le old woman's son_______all her financial affairs．
A．does with B．10eks after C．100ks at D．deals with
[解析]look after有“料理，照料”的意思。题目意思为“这位老妇人的所有财务都由她的儿子打理。”[答案] B
(2)一I felt very bad these days．
-0h，you should_______your body．
A．build up B．1ook at C．think D．take care
[解析]依题意，可知1ook at符合题意，在句中表示“彻底检查”之意。若选D项则加0f。若用build one's body则表示“强身健体”，也不完全符合题意。[答案] B
15．句型A is to B what C is to D的用法
这个句型是用来打比喻的，用已知来比喻未知。它的主句是作者要告诉读者的语义重点(新信息)，而what从句只不过是读者已知的内容(道理)而已。what在这种句型中是关系代词，在语义上相当于that which(the thing which)。what从句在主句中起表语(主语补语)的作用，what在句中也起表语(主语补语)的作用。
The Chinese Communist Parst is to people what fish is to water．
中国共产党对于人民就像鱼对于水
[考题15] Reading is to the mind_______food is to the body．
A．what B．that C．which D．of which (大学生竞赛题)
[解析] 句意为“读书之于头脑正如食物之于身体。”What food is to the body这个从句表达的是读者已知、熟悉的内容，而reading is to the mind才是全句的语义重点。又如：
Furniture is to the living room what playground equipment is to the playground．
家具对于卧室就像体育设施对于操场。[答案]A
16．“充当”的三种表达
act as作“充当；起……作用”。类似用法有 work as．serve as . .
He acted as chairman in my absence．
我不在时，他临时充当主席。
He acted as secretary to the Board．
他担任董事会的秘书一职。
He will serve as mayor．他将任市长一职。
The sofa served as a bed．那张沙发作为床用。
[考题16]_____monitor of our class，little Mike decided to
_____his classmates heart and soul．
A．Serving as；serve B．Serving as；serve as
C．Serving；serve as D．Serving；serve
[解析] 本题要求区别serve与serve as的用法。前者为“为……服务”，后者为“作为…’’。从语境可知，第一空符合后者，第二空符合前者。
[答案]A
17．“不顾”的两种表达
despite作介词，意为“尽管(有某种情况)”。In spite of与其意义及用法完全相同，可以互换。
He came to the meeting despite his serious illness．
尽管他的病很严重，他还是来出席会议了。
Despite advanced years-he is 1earning t0 drive．
尽管有一大把年纪了，他还是开始学起开车来。
In spite of the heavy rain．she went to school as usual．
尽管有大雨，她还像往常一样上学。
[考题17]一You 1ook upset．Anything wrong?
一I failed in the physics exam again___all the efforts I made．
A．in spite of B．because of
C．but for D．as to (20武汉市供题训练题)
[解析] 答语前半句意为“我的物理考试又失败了”，后半句意为
“我作了全部努力”，两句之间存在着让步关系，所以填表示该关系的in spite of，相当于despite。而because of所表示的含义与情理不符，but for引导虚拟语气，也不合题意。As to表示“至于，关于”，被排除。[答案]A
18．“连接”的两种表达
(1)join to作“把……和……连接在一起”。
He joined the two pieces of wood with nails．‘
他用钉子把那两块木板钉起来。
The worker are joining an island to the mainland by a bridge．
工人们正在架桥把一个小岛与大陆连起来。
(2)同义词组为connect…with，强调用中间媒介或一定的手段把两个或多个物体在某一点上连接起来，但彼此较为独立。
Buses and trucks connect the mountain villages with the outside．
公汽与卡车把山村和外界连起来了。
[考题18] (1)A good student must_____what he reads_______what he sees around him．
A．connect；to B．join；to
C．connect；with D．join；with
[解析]本题测试了“把……与……连接起来”的表达，看起来B项与C项均可，但本题并未强调外形结合及连接后的独立性(join的用法)，而是强调“关联；联系”：一个善于学习的学生应该把所学的知识与所见所闻联系起来。答案为C。
(2)Countries all over the world are______with computer．
A．joined B．connected C．taken D．related
[解析] join与relate均与介词to连用。只有be connected with才为正确表达。表示“由……连接”。[答案] B
19．“make+宾语+宾语补足语”的用法
这个结构中的宾语补足语可以用名词、形容词、动词的过去分词、不定式、副词等表示宾语的情况或动作。make带不定式作宾语补足语时，要省略不定式符号，但当make用于被动语态时，不定式符号不能省略。
The Americans elected Bush their President．
美国人民选布什为他们的总统。
We wi11 make our country richer and stronger．
我们将会使我们的国家变得更富强。
He tried to speak clearly to make himself understood．
他尽量说得清楚些以使别人听懂他的话。
Don't make him drink too much．
别让他喝得太多。
[考题19] (1)Little Tom doesn't have to be made_____．He always works hard． (全国高考题)
A．1earn B．to learn C．1earning D．1earned
[解析] 从to be made可知，被动语态中表示动作的不定式符号要恢复。[答案] B
(2)He is made_______monitor of our class．
A．a B．the C．one D．不填
[解析]在“make+宾语+宾补”句型中，如果作宾补的名词是表示独一无二的职位时，该名词前不再加任何冠词；。否则会产生误解与歧义。[答案] D
20．含set的词组小结
set about开始(某工作)；着手做某事
set aside把……放在一边，存储
set down写／记下来(指车辆)停下来让(乘客)下车
set free释放
set off开始，启程
set out从某地出发上路
set up使某人健康／有钱创业等；设置；建立
They've set off on ajourney round the world．
他们已经开始环游世界。
The government has set up a working party to 1ook into the problem of drug abuse．
政府已成立工作组调查滥用毒品问题。
[考题20] (1)The company has______a new braneh in wales．
A．took up B．changed C．set up D．set out
[解析]A选项通常指“从事”，如“take up doing sth.”而B、D两项与句意不符。[答案] C
(2)It is time for supper now．Please______your books aside so that.we can use the table for supper．
A．take B bring C．set D．carry
[解析]set．．．aside表示“把……放在一边，收起来”，符合语境“把书收起来以便吃晚饭”。[答案] c
21．过去分词作宾语补足语的学习
(1)在某些动词如make，have，get，find，keep，leave或某些介词(如with)等感觉动词等后面往往可以带上宾语及宾语补足语(对宾语进行进一步补充、说明、修饰、限定)形式。充当宾语补足语的重要部分之一是过去分词，用来表示该动作的被动与完成。
I found a dog killed on the road．
我发现一只狗被碾死在路上。
He left his work unfinished．
他走了，工作未完成。
Please get the report typed as soon as possible．
请尽快地把报告打印出来。
(2)have sth．done的三重含义：
①请叫／让别人(替自己)做某事
I had my hair cut yesterday．昨天我理发了。
②使某事(被人或自己)完成
He had his house repaired．他把房子修了一下。
③(别人)使(宾语)遭受(意外、不好的)某事
I had my wallet stolen．我的钱包被偷了。
I had my leg broken．我的腿摔断了。
[考题21](1)一Cood morning．Can I help you?
-I’d Iike to have this package_____，madam．
A．be weiglIed B to be weiglled
C．to weigh D．weished (全国高考题)
[解析] 这是顾客与营业员之间的对话。顾客要把包裹给营业员称量一下，符合have sth．done的用法。[答案] D
(2)Having passed all the tests，she felt a great weight____off her mind．(山东潍坊题)
A．taking B．taken c．take D．to be taken
[解析]从结构可知，本题测试“动词+宾语+宾补”的用法中不同形式作宾补的区别：不定式表未来的动作， V．-ing表示正在进行的动作，过去分词表示完成、被动的动作。从本题语境看，通过考试后，她精神上的负担也被卸下了，因此要用过去分词作宾语补足语。[答案]B
(3) Ihe murderer was bfought in，with his hands___behind．
A．tied B．tying c．to tie D．being tied
(全国高考题)
[解析]从句中含有with可知，本题测试with后面的宾语补足语的形式问题。从tie与hand之间存在动宾关系可知，此处宾语补足语要用过去分词形式。[答案]A ’
22．I must say I'd rather live in a traditional siheyuan．我想我 宁愿住在传统的四合院里。
(1)would rather后跟不带to的不定式，即动词原形，常用缩写式’d rather。
一How about a drink?喝一杯怎么样?
一I'd rather have something to eat．我宁愿来点儿吃的。
(2)would rather的否定式是在would rather后加否定词not，即would rather not do sth．
eg：I would rather not go out tonight，if you don't mind．
如果你不介意的话，今晚我不想外出了。
He would rather not listen to jazz．他不愿意听爵士音乐。
(3)在表示“宁愿……而不愿……”时，要用would rather．．．than．．．这一结构，表示在两者之中进行选择。使用这一表达方式要注意用“平行结构”，即在than的前后要用两个同类的词或词组，如两个名词，两个动词不定式，两个介词词组等。
eg：I would rather have red apples than green ones．
我宁愿要红苹果，而不愿意要绿的。
I would rathdr listen to music than go swimming．
我宁愿听音乐，而不愿去游泳。
I would rather talk with her mother than with her father．
我宁愿同她母亲谈，而不愿同她父亲谈。
(4)would rather后接从句，通常用过去式表示虚拟语气。
eg：I'd much rather you told me the truth．我真宁愿你把真相告诉我。
I'd rather he had told me about it．我宁愿他告诉了我那件事。
一What would you like ，the bigger or the smaller?
一1 would rather the smaller．
A.choose；choose B. to choose；choose
C to choose；to choose D. choose；to choose
23．furniture
n. a11 those movable things such as chairs，beds，desks,etc
needed in a house，room，office，etc．(总称)家具；是不可数名词。 eg：a piece of furniture一件家具
two old pieces of furniture两件旧家具
We had little furniture．我们几乎没什么家具。
The old table was a very valuable piece of furniture．那张旧桌子是一件很值钱的家具。
He would like to buy some fashionable for his new flat.
A.furniture B. furnitures C.luggage D. luggages
24．roof[ru：f]．top covering of a building屋顶，顶部
eg：Don't climb onto the roof．不要爬上屋顶。
They can't live under the same roof．他们无法生活在同一个屋 。
【警示】roof的复数形式是roofs，而不是rooves(×)，类似的以“f”结尾的可数名询复数直接加s的词有以下几个：belief(信仰、信念)、chief(首领)、cliff(悬崖)、gulf (海湾)、proof(证据)、serf(农奴)
25.belong．be the property 0f属于，适合
eg：These books belong to me．这些书是我的。
That 1id belongs to this jar．那个盖子是配这个瓶子的。
I belong to the tenni’s club．我是这个网球俱乐部的人员。
【警示】该词不可用于进行时态，如不能说The car is belonging to my uncle．也不用于被动语态，后面的宾语常是名词或宾格代词，不能用名词性物主代词：“mine， yours，hers，his．．．”
belongings n．(使用复数)(个人的)所有物，财产，携带物品eg：
The tourists lost all their belongings in the hotel fire．
因旅馆失火，游客财物尽失。
26. pull down
(1)拉下(遮帘，帘子等)
eg：Shall I pull down the blinds?我可以放下百叶窗吗?
(2)拆毁，拆掉
eg：The old houses were being pulled down．那些旧房子正在拆除中。
(3)使……虚弱
eg：His long illness had pulled him down．他因长期患病身体虚弱。
【拓展】
① pull in拉近，(列车等)到达，进站
② ②pull off脱掉、取下
③ pull on穿上，戴上
④ ④pull OUt拔出，驶出，出站
⑤pull through渡过难关
⑥pull up使……停止
⑦pull up to／with追上，赶上
These houses are being pulled . A new building will be built there．
A．out B．0n C．down D．off
单项填空
1.He seems to like me but I can’t_______the sight of him．
A．take B．hold C．stand D．make
2.Did they Iive_____European style when they were in Japan?
A．in B．on C．with D．to
3.Will you drop in at my house this afternoon if_______?
A．it is convenient for you B．you are convenient
C．it is convenient of you D．you will be convenknt
4.she missed the plane，_____driving very fast to the air-port．
A．despite B．unless C．though D．without
5._____their country has plenty of oil，ours has none．
A．While B．When C．Before D．Where
6.They used to take their holidays in their own country
______foreign countries．
A．in favour of B．in preference to
C．in honour of D．in spite of
7.We saw the houses in the street____in order to make room for a large square．
A．puned off B．pulled up
C．pulled down D．pulled in
8.They hurried back home only to find their house______ into．
A．break B．to break
C．broken D．breaking
9. -Doesn’t Elaine want to see that movie?
-Yes，but she says____go tonight．
A．she’ll rather not B．she’d rather not
C．she’d not rather D．she won’t rather
10.The house has been standing_____without use for months．
A．empty B still C．quietly D．1onely
11.A nest is to a bird____a house is to a man．
A．where B．how C．what D．when
12.When he came to，he found himself____on a chair；
with his hands______back．
A．to sit；tied B．sitting；tying 。
C．sat；tied D．sitting tied
13.We do not feel______to enter modern buildings；every-thing about them seems unfriendly．
A．invited B．inviting C．to invite D．to be invited
14.I’m going to have my letters_____tomorrow if I’ve got them ready by then．
A．to type B．type C．typed D．typing
15.Every great Culture in the past had its own ideas of beauty___in art and literature．
A．expressed B．to express
C．being expressed D．to be expressed
短文改错
Late in the afternoon，the boys put up thek tent 1．____
in the middle of a field．As soon as this was done it， 2．____
they had cooked a meal over an open fire．They were 3．____
all ungry and the food smelt well．After a wonderful 4．____
meal，they said stories and sang songs by the camp 5. ____
fire．But some times later it began to rain．The boys 6．____
felt tired so they put out the fire and crept into his 7._____
tent．Their sleep-bags warm alld comfortable，so 8．_____
they all slept.sounldly．At the middle of the night， 9. _____
one of the boys woke up or began shouting，The tent 10._____
had been flooded!
答案：单项填空
1 C 2 A 3 A 4 A 5 A 6 B 7 C 8 C
9 B 10 A 11 C 12 D 13 A 14 C 15 A
短文改错
1.√ 2.去掉it 3.去掉had 4.well→good
5.said→told 6.times→time 7.his→their
8.warm前加were 9.At→In 10.or→and
知识与能力同步测控题
一、单项填空（共15小题；每小题1分）
1. A computer does only what thinking people __
A. have it do B. have it done
C. have clone it D. having it done
2. The lady said she would buy a gift for her daughter with the
A. 20 dollars remained B. 20 dollars remain
C. remained 20 dollars D. remaining 20 dollars
3.--What happened to Mr Smith early this morning?
--Oh,he was seen __ down and the driver __ away.
A. knock; drive B. knocking; driving
C. knocked; drove D, to knock; driven
4. After half a year's training, they were made entirely used __underwater again.
A. to stay B. to staying C. staying D. stay
5. Mr. Brown was much disappointed to see the washing machine she had had __ went wrong again.
A. it repaired B. to be repaired
C. repair D. repaired
6. I'd rather have a room of my own, however small it is, than______ a room with someone else.
A. share B. to share C. sharing D. to have shared_
7. _______ Lucy for example, she raised her voice so as to make____
A. Take ; herself heard B. Make; her hear
C. Put; herself heaving D. Follow; her heard
8. She was glad that her success would __ for the women who would follow.
A. make things easier B. be easier
C. make it easier D. be easier to make
9. The murderer was brought in, with his hands __ behind his back.
A. being tied B. having tied C. to be tied D. tied
10. --What do you think of your new roommate?
--I can't really_____ her, She's always making loud noises atmidnight. And when I remind her, she always makes rude
remarks.
A. put up with B. catch up with
C. come up with D. keep up with
11. We got lost in the dark forests.______ ,it began to rain.
A. Beside B. Besides C. Expect D. Though
12. He always did weU at school __ having to do part-time jobs every now and then.
A. in spite of B. instead
C. in case of D. in favor of
13. What a great weight the mother felt __ her mind the moment she found her lost son!
A.turned off B. taken off
C. set free D. brought into
14. I think she will____ a good monitor, so I'm going to vote for her.
A. remain B. grow C. turn D. make
15. With our life developing rapidly, people buy ____ to decorate their rooms.
A, a great many furniture B. a lot of furnitures
C. a large number of furitures D. plenty of furniture
二．完形填空（共20小题，每小题1.5分，满分30分）
Building a house costs quite a lot of money. Your first __16___
will be to find a 17 piece of land. Your 18 will depend on many different things. You will probably try to find a sunny place,with 19 surroundings near shops and bus stops, not too farfrom your friends and the place where you work.
20 you will find an excellent 21 , and together with the builder you will work out a 22 . The builder will draw theplan. It will 23 the number of rooms, their position and
24 , and other 25 which must be noticed, 26
windows, doors, and electric outlets. The builder will work out how much money is 27 to build your house. He will work out the 28 of the wood, bricks, the glass, and 29 else that must be used in building the house. Later on, when he starts to build, this estimate mustbe corrected and revised. His estimate is based on 30 price, but prices of such things may change, and many other things may happen 31 the time when he makes the 32 and the time when he builds the house.
When the builder gives his estimate, you may wish to change
your plan. You may also wish to change your builder, if his estimate is too 33 ! You may find that some of the features you wanted at first cost too much, or that you can spend a little more and 34 something to your plan. The builder's estimate depends on the plan, 35 the final plan depends on the builder's estimate.
16. A. step B. plan C. way D. idea
17. A. small B. large C. right D. exact
18. A. land B. choice C. house D. preference
19. A. quiet B. pleased C. lonely D. pleasant
20. A. Yet B. Next C. However D. Though
21. A. worker B. engineer C. builder D. drawer
22. A. plan B. cost C. suggestion D. price
23. A. appear B. design C. show D. recite
24. A. height B. width C. length D. size
25. A. rooms B. doors C. parts D. roofs
26. A. for example B. such as
C. in other words D. on the other hand
27. A. needed B. spent C: collected D. taken
28. A. numbers B. amount C. cost D. level
29. A. something B. everything C. whatever D. others
30. A. rising B. falling C. existing D. remaining
31. A. by B. in C.among D. between
32. A. plans B. design C. estimate D. cost
33. A. expensive B. high C. cheap D. low
34. A. reduce B. place C. add D. lay
35. A. but B. so C. and D. then
三．阅读理解（共20小题，每 题2分，满分40分）
A
In the late 1960's,many people in North America turned their attention to environmental problems, and new steel-and-glass skyscrapers were widely criticized. Ecologists pointed out that a forest of tall buildings in a city often overburdens public transportation and parking lots.
Skyscrapers are also consumers and wasters of electric power.In one recent year, the addition of 17 million square feet of skyscrapers office space in New York City raised the peak daily demand for electricity by 120,000 kilowatts--enough to supply the entire city of Albany, New York, for a day.
Glass-walled skyscrapers can be especially wasteful. The heat loss ( or gain) through a wall of half-inch plate glass is more than ten times that through a typical brick wall filled with insulation (绝缘) board. To lessen the strain on heating and air-conditioning equipment,builders of skyscrapers have begun to use double-glazed panels of glass, and reflective glasses coated with silver or gold mirror films that reduce glare(眩目的光) as well as heat gain.
However, mirror-walled skyscrapers raise the temperature ofthe surrounding air and affect neighboring buildings.
Skyscrapers put a strain on a city's sanitation facilities(卫生设备),too. If fully occupied,the two World Trade Center towers in New York City would alone produce 2.25 million gallons of wastes each year-as much a city the size of Stanford, Connecticut, which has a population of more than 109,000.
Skyscrapers also affect television reception,block bird flyways and air traffic, In Boston in the late 1960's, some people even feared that shadows from skyscrapers would kill the grass on Boston Common. Still ,people continue to build skyscrapers for all the reasons that they have always built them-personal pride and the desire of owners to have the largest possible amount of space to rent.
36. The main purpose of the passage is to __
A. compare skyscrapers with other modern structures
B. describe some architectural designs of skyscrapers
C. describe skyscrapers and their effect on the environment
D. encourage using bricks in the construction of skyscrapers
37. According to the passage, what is one disadvantage of skyscrapers that have mirrored walls?
A. The surrounding air is heated.
B. Construction time is increased.
C. The windows must be cleaned daily.
D. Extra air-conditioning equipment is needed.
38. According to the passage, in the late 1960's some residents of Boston were concerned with which aspect of skyscrapers?
A. The noise from their construction.
B. The high cost of renting an office.
C. The harmful effects on the city's grass.
D. The removal of trees from building sites.
39. The author raises problems that would most concern which of the following groups?
A. Pilots . B. Electricians.
C. Environmentalists. D. Construction workers
B
Art museums are places where people can learn about various cultures. The increasingly popular “ design museums”that are opening today, however, perform quite a different role. Unlike most art museums, the design museum shows objects that are easilyfound by the general public. These museums sometimes even placethings like fridges and washing machines in the center of the hall.
People have argued that design museums are often made useof as advertisements for new industrial technology. But their role is not simply a matter of sales--it is the honoring of excellently invented products. The difference between the window of a department store and the showcase in a design museum is that the first tries to sell you something, while the second tells you the success of a sale.
One advantage of design museums is that they are places where people feel familiar with the exhibits. Unlike the average art museum visitors, design museum visitors seldom feel frightened or puzzled. This is partly because design museums clearly show how and why mass-preduced products work and look as they do, and how design has improved the quality of our lives. Art museum exhibits, on the other hand, would most probably fill visitors with a feeling that there is something beyond their understanding.
In recent years, several new design museums have opened their doors. Each of these museums has tried to satisfy the public's growing interest in the field with new ideas. London's Design Museum,for example, shows a collection of mass-produced objects from Zippo lighters to electric typewriters to a group of Italian fish-tins. The choices open to design museums seem far less strict than those to art museums, and visitors may also sense the humorous part of our society while walking around such exhibits as interesting and unusually attractive toys collected in our everyday life.
40. Showcases in design museums are different from store windows because they __
A. show more technologic~Llly advanced products
B. help increase the sales of products
C. show why the products have sold well
D. attract more people than store windows do
41. The author believes that most design museum visitors.
A. do not admire maes-preduced products
B. are puzzled with technological exhibits
C. dislike exhibits in art museums
D. know the exhibits very well
42. The choices open to design museums __
A. are not as strict as those to art museums
B. are not aimed to interest the public
C. may fail to bring some pleasure to visitors
D. often contain precious exhibits
43. The best title for this passage is .
A.The Forms of Design Museums
B.The Exhibits of Design Museums
C.The Nature of Design Museums
D.The Choice Open of Design Museums
C
CAIRO--After nearly a decade 0f planning , the Egyptian Government has announced an ambitious plan t0 build the world the biggest museum devoted entirelyto exhibitingthe ancient relics(遗物)．Called the New Egyptian Museum，it will eventually housethe largest collection 0f pharaonic(法老的)monuments，including the solid gold death musk of Tutankhamun．King Nebkheperura TutankhalTlun remains the most famous ofallthe Pharaohs 0f Ancient Egypt．He lived over 3，300 years ag0 during the period known as the New Kingdom．The museum will als0 house more than 120，000 antiquities (古代艺术品)from the 4th milknnium(1，000 years)Bc to the fall 0f the Roman Empire．
For the first time．the entire 3，500 items from Tutankhamun’sTomb will be disDlayed．Permanent exhibitions will include the royal mummies of Ramses Ⅱand Ⅲand other pharaohs and a largequantitv 0f collection of Pharaonic jewellery．
Antiquities wiU be 0rganized by the theme rather thanchronogically(编年地)．The four main themes will be：the 1and of EgYPt；royalty and the state；arts of life and death；and scribes(文牍)and wisdom．With building costs estimated near US$31 1 mimon，funding forthe new museum’viU Come from corporate sponsorship(资助)and charitable(慈善的)donations．The Egyptian Government isexpected to pay one tlliId 0f the final bill．
44．Wh0 has planned t0 build the wodd’s biggest museum?
A．The EgYPtian Government．
B．A corporate body．
C．The charitable body．
D．The EgYPtian Government and a corporate body．
45．When you go into one exhibiting hall 0f the wouldbe museum，you’ll see
A．all the exhibits are arranged bythe year
B．all the exhibits are arranged by the theme
C．more than 120，000 Egyptian antiquities are on show
D．Pharaonic monuments of Tutankhamun and the royal relics
46．According to the passage，---
A. the most valuable relics that are to be displayed are 120，000 antiquities from t11e 4th miueBBiuin BC
B．3．500 items 0f relics have been discovered from Tmankhamun's
tomb
C．the Pharaonic monuments ofTutankhamun arethe oldest relics
D．the royal mummies 0f RamsesⅡand Ⅲand 0ther pharaohs
Will be displayed for the second time
47．The best title for the passage should be“--”．
A．Egypt’s AmbitiOUS Plan
B．The Wodd’s Biggest Museum for tlle Ancient Relics
C．EgYPt to Construct New Museum
D．Ancient Egyptian Relics Are to Be Displayed
D
Experts have put forward detailed plans for a tunnel to join Taiwan with the Chinese mainland．
The shortest proposed route wonld be 126 kilometers-more than twice the length 0f the Endish Channel Tunnel．And the longest proposed route would be 207 kilometers．
A recent conference in xiamen，Fujian Province brought together more than 70 experts．The event was co一sponsored(共同发起)by universities from Taiwan and the Chinese mainland．Fujian is the province where both proposed mutes would begin．
There is no direct passenger access(通道)between the mainland and Taiwan by air or sea at the moment．
Experts say that it is better to start research sooner rather than later，althongh there is a lack 0f government funding(资金)．There are no technical problems t0 build a Taiwan tunnel．But it will require an improved political relationship across the Straits．
A professor 0f TsinghHa University said，“A special feature 0f huge projects is that the period of preparation is longer than the period 0f construction．”
For example，he said，the Endish channel Tunnel took 14 years 0f planning and had been discussed for two centuTies．And
preparations for the huge Three Corges(三峡)dam on the Yangze River began in the 1950s．
The xiamen conference focused on the longest southern route，which would use the Taiwan-controlled islands of Jinmen and Penghu as stepping_stones.
The first stage 0f the new project could be a bridge to cross the five kilometers between Xiamen and Jinmen．This would mean that traveling from Xiamen to Jinmen by car would only take five minutes．
The longest tunnel now being planned anywhere in the world is the 54-kilometer land tunnel to link Lyon in France with Turin in Italy．The tunnel will not be completed until -．
48．Which is the longest tunnel in the world at present?
A．The Endish Channel Tunnel．
B．The tunnel between Lyon and Turin．
C．The Taiwan straits tunnel_
D．The passage does’t mention it．
49．The example of English Channel Tunnel shows--．
A．it’s important to complete a huge project
B．there are many problems to be solved before doing somethihg
C．discussions among countries usually take a lot 0f time
D．the preparation takes 1onger time than the construction
50．Which oftlle following is NOT true?
A．Universities both at_home and abroad have sponsored(赞助)the plan．
B.If the project is completed，the world's longest tunnel willappear． ．
C．You can't reach Taiwan from the mainland directly atPresent.
D．The starting point of the proposed tunnel is in Fujian．
51．What is the possible difficulty in carrying out the plan?
A．The 1ack 0f money for the project from the government．
B．Improving the relationship between Taiwan and the mainland．
C．The detailed plans for the tunnel．
D．The technical problems with the tunnel．
E
SHANGHAI--The Shanghai World Financial Centre will be
the tallest land-mark in the world after its completion this century in Pudong, according to the project's Japanese investors.
The building will be located in the prime Lujiazui Zone in
Pudong , on a 30,000-square-metre site. The building was originally designed to be a 94-floor office tower with a height of 460 metres.
The project broke ground in but was later halted as a
result of the financial crisis in Southeast Asia.
“As the economy warms up, we are more confident about
Shanghai and the whole China and we are working hard to get the
Project restarted as soon as possible,” said Katsuyuki Takeuchi,
vice-president and general manager of the Shanghai World
Financial Centre Company.
Its parent company, Japan-based Moil Building Co. Ltd,
established the Shanghai subsidiary as the opreator responsible for this ambitious project. The design, which is undergoing revision in apan, will accommodate international high-tech businesses,
department stores, art galleries, clubs and a five-star hotel. Unlike the gloomy economies of the United States, Europe and Japan, China enjoys a strong growth with brighter prospects, Takeuchi said.
More capital and businesses are expected to flow into
Shanghai, which aims to become a world centre for trade and the
financial industry--with Lujiazui as its showpiece.
The layout of Luijiazui includes three tall buildings, one of
which is the completed Jinmao Tower, each rising above 400
metres, as designed by local government after holding an international design competition early last decade.
Other buildings nearby fall in height gradually, creating a
special shape against the skyline. The Shanghai World Financial
Centre will be built as the peak of the mountain.
“The peak will be safe thanks to the perfect design,advanced
technology and the stable social and political environment in
Shanghai,” Takeuchi said, reassuring those who might be anxious
about the safety of the soon-to-be world's tallest building.
52. Why is the Shanghai World Financial Center to be built? :
A. Because it is by the bank of the Changjiang River.
B. Because it is going to be the highest building in China.
C. Because the economy of China is of a better future than of other countries.
D. Because the builders in Shanghai could be sure of the quality of the building.
53. Seen from a long distance,the Lujiazui Zone looks like a(an)
A. apple B. mountain C. box D. basin
54. Why will the Shanghai World Financial Center be of great safety?
A. Because it will be the peak of a mountain.
B. Because its design and technology are of the top levels.
C. In Shanghai there is a stable social and political environment.
D.B and C.
55. Which of the following has the same meaning as the sentence“... reassuring those who might be anxious about the safety of the soon-to-be world's tallest building”
A. Comfort the people so that they won't worry about the safetyof the peak.
B. Tell the people the tallest building will be finished soon.
C. Advise people not to be anxious about the building until it is finished.
D. Make sure that the building will be built in Shanghai.
短文改错（满分10分）
The Great Wall of China is being called“the
56.
Ten-Thousand-Li Great Wall”in Chinese. It has the history of
57.
over twenty centuries. Parts of it were built through different 58.
dynasties. It was during the Qin Dynasty when the parts were 59.
joined up into one long wall. It's very difficult build such 60.
a long wall in the ancient days without some modern machines. 61.
All the work were done by hand. Thousands of men died 62.
of cold and hungry when they were forced to work on the 63.
wall. Today the Great Wall has become a place of interesting 64.
to the Chinese and to the people in all over the world~ 65.
书面表达（满分25分）
请你根据以吓图表和提示写一篇关于我国手机拥有量变化的报道，并阐述手机给人们生活带来利与弊。
1。方便
2． 随时，随地联系；
3． 许多功能满足不同要求。如发短信，上网等；
4． 接到打错的电话并为之付费；
5． 电磁辅射（radiation）有害健康。
注意：1。词数100左右；2。开头已写好
As can be seen from the chart...
Unit3 知识与能力同步测控题
1．A it指代计算机；人们让计算机做事情，所以d0的逻辑主 语就是计算机(it)，那魔作为宾语补足语的形式用动词原形 即可。 ’
2．D本句含”with+宾语+宾补”句型，因为一remain为不及物。
动词，所以没有过去分词形式作宾补及定语用法，所以表示“剩 下的”时，用remaining即可。
3．C Mr!Smith是被人看到被车撞倒，所以作宾补的应是过去分词形式。后一分句由and连接，独立成句，所缺成分作谓 语动词。
4．B be used to doing sth．表示“习惯于做某事”，当它作宾语 补足语时．be动词去掉即可。、
5．D“she had”作定语从句，修饰“洗衣机”；洗衣机是让别人修理，所以应用被动语态作宾补。
6．A 中包含句型would rather do sth than do sthl．。
7．A表示“举例子”用take…for example；第二空表示Lucy 提高嗓音以便让她自己被别人听见。
8．A若选B、D则成了“成功是较容易”，不符合题意。it一般要代替不定式，但本题中无不定式。who引导的定语从句只修饰women，而for the women作本句的状语，所以只能选意义完整的A项作为答案。
9．D该结构的难点在于应用哪一种形式作宾补。本题中的 “小偷被带来了，他的双手是被人绑在身后”，所以应用过去分词形式作宾补。
lO．A catch up witll表示“跟上；赶上”，come up with表示“提出”，keep up with表示“跟上”，均不符合语境体现出来的 “我的确容忍不了她”。
11．B从句意及用法看，后者表示的是递进关系，所以用副词 besides .
12．A “did well”与后半句的“不时地做兼职工作”之间是让步关系。
13．B turn 0ff表示“关闭；使人厌倦”，set free表示“释放”，bring into表示“使进入某种状态”。语境表示“当她见到失踪的儿子时候，心头多么大的负担被卸掉了啊!” feel a great weight taken off是其正常语序。
14．D当表示“有条件成为……(人或物)”时，用make表示。 又如：She will mke a good wife．她将会成为一位好妻子。
15．D fumiture表示家具的总称，是个不可数名词，不可由a great many，a number of等词修饰，也无复数形式。
16．A此处指建房的第一步(step)是选择一块合适的土地。
17．C此处指建房选择土地。不是选大、小土地，而是选合适的土地。 。
18．B “选址”这个选择取决于很多东西。
19. D 一般要选择阳光充足，周围环境优美的地方。
20．B 现在指下一步该干什么。
21. C 就在此空后面有the builder，所以本空指选一个好的建筑师。
22．A 从下文the builder will draw the plan可知。
23．C it指代建筑图纸，它的上面是标明了各自的位置。
24．D 图纸上标的是房间数、房间的大小及位置等。
25．C 一座房子不仅仅只有房间，还有其他的部分。
26．B 这些部分比如说(such as)，有门、窗、电线等部分。举出部分例子用such as。
27．A 此处指建筑师也会帮你算出建房要多少钱。
28．C 这些材料得花费多少钱。
29．B 指其他的建房需要的一切。
30．C 此时的预算只是依当时存在的价钱算的，所以在以后的日子会有浮动。
31．D 由下文的the time…与the time…可知指两段时间之间。
32．C指作预算的时间与做房子时的两个时间。
33．B 当然指价钱要得太高的话，你可能换个建筑师。
34．C add．．．t0为习语，表示“把……添加到……上去”。
35. A 两句话(建筑师的估计取决于计划、计划取决于建筑师的估计)之间存在对比转折关系。
36．C本文主要记叙摩天大楼及其对环境的影响。
37．A 从第三段最后一句话中的raise the temperature可以推出。
38．C本题是个细节理解题。从第五段最后一句话可知。
39．C从36题可知，摩天大楼对环境产生极大的影响，因为与此最相关的人当然是环境学家了。
40．C从第二段内容可知。
41．D普通博物馆似乎拒人于千里之外，但大多数参观“设计博物馆”的人十分喜欢这种形式，那么对展品就不太陌生,甚至很了解了。
42．A见最后一段第三句话。
43．C nature此处指“本性、特征”。而不是指自然。因此“设计博物馆的特性”便是最好的标题了。
44．A答案可以从第一段知道。
45．B倒数第二段第一句提供了答案。
46．B见第五段内容。其余三个选项均与文中事实不符。
47．C第一段告诉读者，埃及政府经过多年的筹划，现在宣布将建造世界上最大的古文物博物馆。随后讲了该博物馆的作用、特点以及筹款方式等。所以C项才能恰当地反映文章主题。
48．D 题目的意思是指现在世界上最长的已经建成的隧道。英吉利海峡隧道并没有在文章中提到是否是最长的；根据文章的最后一段，法国到意大利的海峡隧道还未建成；台湾海峡隧道虽是文章介绍的主题，但还在计划之中，所以文章没有告诉我们答案。
49．D 英吉利海峡隧道的例子在第八段，主要是为了证明第七段的观点。
50．A文章只提到计划是台湾和大陆的大学发起，没有提到国外的大学，故A项不对；B项不能只看文章最后一段提到法国至意大利的海峡隧道是最长的，而the project(台湾海峡隧道)比它要长的多；c项在第五段提到；D项在第四段提到。
51．B 从第六段的But it will require and improved political relationship across the Straits．中“require(需要)”，说明这方面还是障碍；虽然第六段中提到A项，但句中用了although(尽管)这个词，可见资金方面不是主要问题；c项是文章一开始就说明已经完成的事项；D项从第六段There are no technical problems to build a Taiwan tunnel．得知，也是不成问题的。
52．c由第五段可知，与日本、美国、欧洲等相比，中国经济发展的潜力更大。
53．B由倒数第二段可知，陆家嘴金融区分三部分，中间高，四周低，nearby，gradually，in the middle是关键词。
54．D最后一段可知，在上海建造世界金融中心，有三个有利因素：完美的设计；先进的技术；安定的社会环境。
55．A在所给的四个选项中，唯有comfort与reassure(打消……的疑虑)最接近，其他三项均与文意不符。
56．去掉being 。is being called是现在进行时态的被动语态。此处应该用一般现在时。is called表示“被称为……”。
57．the改为a 。have a history of…为固定用法。
58．√。
59．when改为that。此处是强调句型。
60．在build前面加to。It is+adj．+to do sth．结构中，it为形式主语。动词不定式是真正的主语。
61．some改为any。without表示否定意义。
62．were改为was。work为不可数名词，谓语动词用单数形式。
63．hungry改为hunger。die 0f cold and hunger：死于寒冷和饥饿．。
64．interesting改为interest。习惯用法。a place 0f interest：名胜。风景。
65．in改为from。表示“来自世界各地”。应用介词from。
书面表达One possible version：
As can be seen from the chart，great changes have been taking place in the ownership 0f mobile phones in China．At the end of ，there were 20 million mobile users．By the year ，the number will reach up to 30 million．People have found mobile phones very convenient．they Can get in touch with each other whenver and wherever they like．There are many different functions for different needs．Such as sending short messages and surfing the Internet．However，it may also bring
us some trouble．For example．You will have to pay for a wrong number，and the radiation from the phone may do harm to our health．In spite of this，the number of people having mobile phones is still increasing steadily．
篇2：Unit 3 reading(学案)(人教版高二英语上册学案设计)
Step1. Review and Lead-in
Pictures in textbook P19
Look at the picture and describe what you see, what does it look like?
Step 2. Pre-reading:
Do you think the text will be about the following topics?
1.The text is about classical Chinese architecture. ( )
2.Some modern architecture takes examples from nature. ( )
3.The text is about parks and gardens. ( )
Step 3. Reading:1.Scanning:
Part1( ) A.The differences between traditional.. and modern..,and why ancient architecture had many beautiful buildings
Part2( ) B. Every great culture in the past had its own ideas expressed in art and architecture
Part3( ) C. Examples of famous architects and great buildings that take examples from nature.
Part4( ) D. How and when modernism came into being?
2.Careful reading:
----Find out the information according to the key words
Modern architecture
Q1: When was modernism invented?
Q2: Why did a group of architects invent modernism?
Q3. Compare ancient architecture with modern architecture according to the passage.
Q4: How many architects are there in the text?
Q5: Where were they from?
Q6: What did Gaudi want to be used in his works? What’s the characteristic of his architecture? How is his architecture like?
Balconies look like _________.
Walls seem to be covered with the _____
of a _____.
The roof looks like the ____ of a _______.
Other parts look like ________.
Q7: What inspired Wright?
Q8: How many examples are there in the text?
Q9: How do they look like?
Q10: Why do we call the Olympic Stadium in Beijing” the Bird’s nest”?
Q11: What do they (two architects / two examples) have in common?
Step 4. Reading aloud
What do the words in bold refer to ?
Step 5. Post-reading
1. Multiple-choice:
1.Which of the following belongs to modern architecture?
A.Taihe Dian
B.The Temple of Heaven
C.The Opera House is Sydney
D.The great European Cathedrals
2.From this passage we can infer that _____.
A.The writer prefers ancient buildings to modern ones.
B.The writer prefers traditional materials to modern ones.
C.The writer doesn’t like modern architects at all.
D.The writer prefers buildings that look natural to ones that look unnatural.
3.Which of the following best expresses the main idea of this passage?
A.Ancient architecture is popular.
B.Modern architecture is popular.
C.Ancient buildings look more beautiful than modern ones.
D.Different times, different styles of architecture.
2. True or false:
1.To many people modern architecture equals progress.( )
2.Many people find modern buildings unfriendly and ugly.( )
3.Modern architecture stands closer to nature than ancient architecture.( )
4.Gaudi was a Spanish ancient architect.( )
5.There are a few sharp corners and straight lines in Gaudi’s designs.( )6.Gaudi only used natural materials, such as stone, brick and wood.( )
7.Opera House in Sydney makes many people think of seashells.( )
8.The 2008 Olympic Stadium in Beijing will be made of stones and bricks.( )
3.Discussion:Task: Design (group work)
--- Design the architecture of a new school.
---Report four elements: what kind of materials is used? / Why do you design in this way? / How do the architecture look like? / What’s the style?
篇3：人教版 高二教案学案一体化unit 7
Unit 7 Living with disease
类别 课程标准要求掌握的项目
话
题 1．Talking about medicine and health
，Ta1king about deadly diseases and attitudes towards them
词
汇
quiz false virus via blood prevention persuade defenceless illness treatment unprotected sex lack proper available discourage cheer network specialist meaningful fierce stranger cell radiation strength recover fighter contrary
1ive with die of cheer(…)up suffer from on the contrary for the moment free from
功
能
1．支持或反对意见、观点(Supporting and challenging an opinion)
I think that…，because…
First，…
One reason is that…
For example，…
If we／they were to…，we／they could…
Perhaps．but what if／about…?
Have you thought about…?
What makes you think that…?
Could you please explain…?
If I were you，I ould…
2．描述虚拟情景(Describing imaginary situations)
If 1 were you，1 would…
1 wish… 。
If we were to…，we／they could…
……as if…..
语
法
虚拟语气(1)
用来表示说话人所说的话不是事实，而只一种愿望、假设、怀疑、建议、猜测、可能或纯粹的空想等,用虚拟语气.
例如：
If I were not so busy now，1 would go with you
1 wish I cou ld remember more about my mum
If we didn’t know how HIV spreads，we would easily get AIDS
教学目的和要求(Teaching aims and demands)
LISTENING -TEXT:(课文中)
The Disease Detective
Jane is one of the experts at the Center for Disease Control and Prevention. People at the Center study how diseases start and spread and, as the name shows, try to control and prevent diseases. We asked Jane about her work.
J = Jane; I = Interviewer
Part 1
J: Well, I have to be a detective: I go to a place where a disease has broken out and I look for clues about the disease. I try to find as much information as I can about what happened. Who is sick? What are the signs--- do they have a fever, a headache or a sore throat? When did they get sick? When I have collected the information, I use it to find out what caused the problem. We can use what we learn to prevent others from getting sick.Jane and other disease detectives at the Center do their jobs in different ways. Some detectives work in laboratories where they examine tests and samples. Others travel to towns or villages where there are diseases and talk to people who are sick. All of the experts at the Center know that their work is important. If they do their jobs well, they will save lives.
Part 2
I: How often do you actually go to places where a new disease has broken out?
J:Oh, it happens every now and then. Probably about every three months or so.
I.How do you find out about new diseases?
J: We will usually hear from doctors and hospitals. If they notice anything strange, they will give us a call and ask for help. If we think it is necessary, we'll go to the place where people are getting sick.
I: Aren't you afraid of catching the diseases you are studying?
J: Well, yes, sometimes. But we are always very careful. If you know what you are doing, you can protect yourself. Besides, I'm more afraid of what might happen if we don't find out what kind of disease it is.
I: What can ordinary people do to protect themselves?
J: The best thing you can do is simplyto wash your hands often and try to avoid crowded places. Wearing a mask over your face may help, but it is probably not .necessary unless you are caring for a sick person.It is also important to see a doctor if you get sick,so that you don't spread a disease without knowing it.
Answers to Part 1:
1 They are trying to control and prevent diseases.
2 Jane usually asks people if they have a fever, headache or sore throat. She also asks when they got sick.
3 She usesthe information she collects to f'md out what caused the disease.
4 Some detectives work in a laboratory, and others,like Jane, travel to areas where a disease has broken out to collect information.
Answers to Part 2:
1 Sample notes:
a. goes out about every 3 months
b.finds out about new diseases from doctors and hospitals
c.sometimes visits areas
d.sometimes afraid but always careful
e. you can protect yourselves by washing hands & not going to crowded places; see a doctor if you're sick
2 Various answers are possible. The answers should reflect the students' understanding of what they have heard on the tape, eg the basic process (collecting information and using it to find the causes of the disease).
LISTENING TEXT(课后)
K = Ken; W = Dr Watts
Part 1
K: Hello, Dr Watts. Thank you for letting me interview you.
'W: You're welcome. Now, what would you like to know?
K: Well, my first question is about the name of the disease. What does AIDS stand for?
W: When we talk about AIDS, we often use the term HIV/AIDS. HIV is the virus that causes AIDS. AIDS stands for ”Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome“.
K: Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome. OK, got it.But I'm not sure I understand what it means.
W: Well, to ”acquire“ something is to get something, so ”acquired“ means that you can get infected with the disease. ”Immune“ comes from ”immune system“,the system that protects our body from diseases. .
K: So ”acquired immune“ tells us that this is a disease that we can get from other people and that has something to do with our immune system. What exactly does AIDS d~ to our immune system?
W: That's what the next word tells us. If something is”deficient“, it means that it isn't functioning pnoperly, it isn't working the way it should. So ”acquired immune deficiency' means that even though we wene born with a good immune system, wehave nowgot a disease that bneaks down the immune system.
K: Wow, that's terrible! So what happens when someone'simmune system doesn't work?
W: Well, to put it simply, he or she gets sick a lot. The last word in AIDS, “syndrome”, means all the bad things that happen to your body when the immune system doesn't work.
Part 2
People who die of AIDS actually don't die of AIDS. When a person infected with HIV develops AIDS, he or she easily gets sick. A person with AIDS has a very weak immune system. Many common diseases can be cured in patients whose immune system functions well, but when they enter the body of a person with AIDS, they can kill him or her. Many AIDS patients die of infections or serious colds, but there are also many diseases that we have never heard of. If your immune system is working,they may not be able to do any harm, but because the immune system has been weakened, the diseases can't be cured. They. will grow stronger and stronger until one day they kill the patient with AIDS. Therefore, much of the treatment an AIDS patient receives is meant to help the body defend itself against diseases.
Answers to Part 1“
1A = Acquired I = Immune D =Deficiency S = Syndrome
2 1) Acquired means that you get. something from someone.In ”AIDS“, it means that AIDS is a disease that we get from other people.
2) The immune system protects the body from diseases.
3) AIDS breaks down the immune system.
4) People can become infected with HIV / AIDS through blood transfusions, unprotected sex and childbirth.
5) We should learn more about the disease and avoid unsafe practices.
5) We can ask doctors and nurses to tell us about the disease and we can read about the disease in books and on the Internet.
Answers to Part 2:
1 When a person infected with HIV (develops) AIDS,he or she easily gets (sick).
2 A person with AIDS has a very (weak immune system).
3 Many AIDS patients die from (infections ) or serious colds, but there are many diseases that we have never (heard ) of.
4 Therefore, much of the (treatment) an AIDS patient receives is meant to help the body (defend itself) against diseases.
阅读本单元对话与课文，完成下列各题：
§1．1细枝末节
(Passage 1)
I-Which of the following is true?
A．People will die iromediately after they get AIDS．
B．HIV spreeds only through blood．
C．Xiaohua was three when her mother died．
D．AIDS is a disease that breaks down the hody’s immune system and leaves a person defense against infections and illnesses．
2 Which of the following is NOT true?
A．In ，3．2 million children in the world were infected with HIV．
B．The disease is spreeding faster in America and Parts of Asia
C．Xiaohua knows she will die before she can grow up．
D. Xiaohua wants to be a doctor to help AIDS patients．
3 What are the means of being infected with AIDS?
A．Through b1ood and other body liquids．
B．By having unprotected sex．
C．Through birth．
D．All of the above．
(Passage 2)
4 Which of the following is true?
A． On that Thursday afternoon，I knew I got cancer．
B． Cance can be treated.
C．Doctors know why some people get cancer．
D．Cancer can be caused by injury．
5 Which of the following is NOT true?
A．Whan I heard I got cancer，I thought my life was going to end．
B．If one gets cancer,cells either divide too fast or at the wrong time．
C． All the people who got cancer will be treated with radiation.
D After 2 years’treatment，I changed my mind towards cancer.
6 How did“I”feel when I heard the news?
A．Sad． B．0ptimistic．C．Empty． D．Nothing serious．
§1．2主旨大意
7 Passage 1 mainly tells us--．
A．how terrible AIDS is B．how misarable Xiaohua is
C．what we should do towards AIDS and AIDS patiants
D．how to help Xiaohua
8 Passage 2 mainly tells us-．
A．how“I”got cancer．
B what cancer is.
C．how I came through the shade of cancer
D． how my friends help me
§1．3推理判断
9 From Passage 1,we can infer that___________
A．we should aoid any contact with AIDS patiants
B．Xiaohua wants to givea hug to an AIDS patient
C Xiaohua’s life won’t be as 1ong as her classmates’so sh is unhappy
D．people should try to know about AIDS.
10 What can we get from Passage2?
A．I loved my mother．
B．The cancer can be defeated if only we can fight with it．
C．Cancer does not spreed from one person to another．
D．“I’’plan to live a long life
知识点
1．persuade vt.说服；劝服；使相信
A persuade sb．to do sth．
或persuade sb．into doing sth说服某人干某事
B persuade sb. out of(doing) sth.=persuade sb. not to do sth.“说服某人不做某事”，
C persuade sb．of sth./that从句这一结构。使某人相信某事
He persuaded her to go(或into going)with him．
他说服了她和他-起去。(结果她和他一块去了。)
I persuaded him to give up smoking．=I persuaded him out of smoking．
我说服了他戒烟。(结果他戒烟了。)
I have never persuaded him to take the job．
=Many times I tried to persuade him to take the job，but I didn’t succeed／but I failed to．
我始终没说服他接受这份工作。(我想说服他接受这份工作，但他不听。)
I persuaded him of its truth./ that it was true.我使他相信这是真的。
He persuaded me that death does not end all．
他说服了我，使我相信死并不能使-切都结束。
◇[考题1](1)He was a heavy smoker一--him to give up smoking but he just wouldn’t listen to me．
A．suggested B．tried to persuade C．persuaded D．managed
[解析] 如果说而不服或劝而不服，则不能用persuade，因为这时说服则成了一种愿望或企图，所以应用try to persuade或advise等别的词不能说I persuaded him to do it, but he wouldn’t．因为I persuaded him to do it．已经表示了“说服了他做那事”，因此前句与后句在意思上相互矛盾了。应说I tried to persuade him to do it but he wouldn’t或I advised him to do it but he wouldn’t．而suggest后面不可接复合不定式；manage to d sth．表示“成功地做成某事”。[答案] B
(2)The fire in the hotel broke out at midnight and spread quickly，but every one--to escape from being burned or killed．
A．was able to B．tried C．failed D．succeeded to
[解析] 前半句句意表示旅馆发生了大火。从句中的转折连词.but可知，每个人都逃脱出来了。而B、c表示未能逃出，不合题意。 D项应用succeed in doing sth．表达才对。[答案]A
2 lack，v&n缺乏；不足
lacking adj.不够的 欠缺的
A, a lack of 缺少,不足 have no lack of 不缺乏,for lack of 因为缺乏
B vt. lack sth.缺…….
C be lacking in 缺乏(品质,特点)
I lacked the courage to do it． 我缺乏做那件事的勇气。
I 1ack words with which to express my thanks．
我缺乏用以表达感谢的话语。
Good food is lacking． 精美的食物很匮乏。
He is not lacking in wisdom． 他并不缺乏聪明才智。
The meeting ended because of 1ack of order．
因为秩序混乱，会议中止了。
◇[考题2] (1)Though --money，his parents managed to send him to university．(上海高考题)
A．1acked B．1acking of C．1acking D．1acked in
[解析]1ack是个及物动词，后面带有宾语“钱”，又因“父母”与“缺乏”之间存在主谓关系，所以此题要用表示主动含义的lacking作状语。若选B，则要把of改为in。[答案] C
(2)I’m sorry．We’re--．that kind of trousers．would you come back next week?
A．short B．1acking C．in need D．short of
[解析] 在表示“短缺，需要”时，可用be short of、be lacking in、in need(of)等表示。[答案] D
3 proper adj.恰当的；正确的；自己的；本身 (后置)；大，狠
properly adv．正确地；恰当地；严格地；完全地(口语中)
1 want to go on with my work under proper conditions.．
我想在恰当的条件下继续我的工作。
Please go to your proper seats．请回到各自的位子上去。
Shellish are not among the fishes proper.
有壳的水生动物本身就不是鱼类。
◇[考题3] (1)I don’t think Peter is too young to take care of the pet dog--．(上海高考题)
A．correctly B．properly C．exactly D．actively ．
[解析] 四个选项的含义分别为：正确地，影恰当地，精确地和积极地。从语境看，“我认为彼得并不太小而以致于不会…一一地照看那只宠物狗”，只有用“合适地、恰当地”才最符合题意。[答案] B
(2)It was late．He wondered whether it would be ____to knock at the door of her room．
A．proper B．better C．interesting D．disappointed
[解析] 句意表示“夜深了，他想知道敲她的门是否--”B项中没有必要用比较级，C、D两项与句意均不符。proper”合适。恰当”最合题意。[答案]A
4．discourage vt.使人丧失勇气；妨碍
A discourage sb.
The hardship she faced discouraged her．她面临的艰难使她泄气
B 常用于被动语态, be/get discouraged
They got discouraged and went home．他们泄气了，回家了。
C discourage sb.from doingsth. 劝某人打消做某事的念头,阻止某人做某事
His mother discouraged him from joining the navy，saying it was a hard life,but he refused to be discouraged．
他的母亲阻止他参加海军，说它是一种很艰苦的生活，但他拒绝被劝阻。
D discouraging adj.令人泄气的,使人灰心的
The examination result is discouraging.
[考题4] It's very--that every time I try to ride a bicycle，I fell off． ’
A.discouraged B．discouraging
C．discouragement D．being discouraged
[解析】 A、B、c三项是discourage的派生词，分别表示“沮丧的、令人沮丧的、失望(沮丧)”。D项表示“正在被打击”，不合语境。因为主语是that引导的主语从句，所以作表语要用“使人沮丧的”。[答案] B
5．on the contrary(与此)相反的是
You weren't boring me．On the contrary．you're interesting me．
你并没有使我厌倦。相反的是，你使我十分感兴趣。
一Have you nearly done?一你差不多快完成了吗?
--On the contrary，I have only just begun．一恰恰相反，我才刚刚开始。
I did not go to London，on the contrary 1 went to Paris．
我没去伦敦，而是去了巴黎。
contrary adj.相反的,相对的,逆向的,对抗的。
in contrary directions 朝相反的方向,be contrary to rules 违规的
◇[考题5] (1)一He's no use at a11．- ---，I have found him a great deal of use．
A．Generally speaking B．Believe it or not
C．First of all D．On the contrary
[解析] 上文的no use与下文的a great deal of use在语意上完全相反，所以插入语的含义应该是“相反的是”才对。[答案] D
(2)We are told that“hot”and“cold”are_____ terms．
A．contrary B．similar C．same D．different
[解析] 句意表示“冷和热是一对反义词”，所缺形容词表示“相反的”，类似于opposite。[答案]A
6． against prep．反对；对立；迎着；预防；在…情况／背景下
He was standing，ho1ding onto a tree that grew against the wall．
他站在那儿，紧紧抓住一棵靠墙长着的一棵树。
Put the piano against the wall，please．请把钢琴靠墙放。
Political leaders fought against slavery．政治领导人与奴隶制度作斗争。
Is he for or against my plan?对于我的计划他是赞成还是反对?
What you have done is against the law.你所做的事情是违背法律的。
◇[考题6](1)Because we were sailing--the wind，we had great diffculty in getting to the opposite bank．
A．with B．against C．by D．at
[解析]从语境看，我们费了极大的困难才达到了彼岸，所以是“逆风而行”才会如此。with the wind表示“顺风而行”。没有其他两种搭配。
[答案] B
(2)You'd better put away some money for old age．That is to say．to save money--a rainy day．
A．by B．before C．at D．against
[解析] a rainy day表示“有难的日子”，所以本题表示“为以后需要的日子作准备。”against此处可以作此用法，表示“预备；防备；准备….时用”。答案为D。
7．available adj．可利用的。可达到的。有效的
My study is availabIe． !我的书房可供使用。
The drugs that are available are mach too expensive.那些有效的药物价格太高。
That man is not available for the job；he has other work．
那个人不能做这项工作，因为他有其他的工作
◇[考题7]一I’d like a table for six．
一Sorry，Sir，but we don't have any tables--right now．
A．usable B．suitable C．comfortable D．available
[解析] “usab1e”意为“能用的”，使用对象多为工具等；
“suitable”强调合适，“comfortable”强调舒适，均不合题意。题干给予信息为：可我们现在却没有任何桌位空缺。[答案] D。
8． cheer与cheer up的用法
(1)cheervt.，意为“鼓舞…‘给予信心”“为……欢呼，喝采”。
The news cheered everyone of us．
这消息使我们人人都高兴。
The boys cheered their football team．
男孩子向他们的足球队欢呼加油。
(2)cheer n.，是可数名词，意为“赞扬声…‘鼓励声”，作不可数名词时，意为“欢乐感”。干杯,谢谢,(英语电话中)再见.
Her performance drew cheers．她的表演赢得一片喝彩声。
The boy was moved by the words of cheer．
鼓舞人心的话令这个男孩感动。
(3)cheer up(使)高兴起来。cheer sb.up
Cheer up!Things are not as bad as they seem．
乐观一点!事物并不像看上去那么糟。
[考题8] (1)It--the old woman to have her young neighbour
visit her．Even she was very happy for a whole day．
A．cheered B．bored C．troubled D．comforted
[解析] 句意为“老太太的年轻邻居来访，使她很高兴，甚至为此她高兴了整天。”B、C选项中“麻烦”让人生厌“等意思显然不合题意。D选项意为“安慰”，A选项意为“使……高兴”。相比之下，A项更符合语境。[答案]A
(2)He is--in his mind，so he is popular with us．
A．cheerful B．merry C．glad D．joyful
[解析] 句意为“他天性乐观，因此在我们当中大受欢迎。”cheerful多指人天性乐观，在任何情况下保持欣然的样子；merry多指在节日或其他热闹表现出来的快乐情绪；glad指由于某一特定事物或原 因而使人们的心理产生暂时的喜悦；joyful指由于某特别的事件或情景而产生的喜悦心情。本句中主要指一种天性的乐观，所以只有A项是正的。 [答案] A
9. suffer v 受苦；遭受(损失等)；忍受
suffer for表示因某事而受罚，suffer from表示患病等。
The iniured man was still suffering．
那位受伤的男子还正承受着折磨。
He’11 suffer for his foolery、他将会因自己蠢行受罚。
The city suffered serious damage from the earthquake．
这个城市因地震而遭到严重破坏。
She suffered from the strange disease．她承受着怪病的煎熬。
[考题9]--such heavy pollution already，it may now be too late to clean up the river．(全国高考题)
A．Having suffered B．Suffering C．To suffer D．Suffered
[解析] 本题考察分词短语作状语的用法。分词作状语，其逻辑主语是句子主语，而本句主语看似为it，实际it作形式主语，真正主语为不定式，而不定式前应视为省略其逻辑主语for people。这样一来就清楚了，应用现在分词，再依据already的提示，应用完成时态。，所以用Having suffered。[答案]A
10．meaningful adj.意味深长的。富有意义的
Without working．the life isn't meaningful．
不工作的人生是没有意义的。
It is meaningful to sovle the diffculty．解决这个难点很有意义。
I hope to live a meaningfu1 life．我希望过一种有意义的生活。
[考题10]一Tom，P1ease don't watch too much TV．It's a waste of time．Hcw about doing something--instead?
一OK，mum，I’ll turn off it right now．
A．comfortable B．interesting C．meaningful D．good
[解析]根据语境分析，填meaningful较恰当；A、B两项不合题意，D项太抽象，而且不地道，因为看电视也是一种娱乐，有趣舒适， 但没有太大意义。[答案] C
11．fierce adj．凶猛的，猛烈的，强烈的
Oh! What a fieree tiger! 哇!多么凶猛的老虎!
There was a fierce storm last night．昨晚有一场暴风雨。
With a fierce effort,her maths has been greatly improved．
凭借拼命的努力，她的数学有了很大进步。
◇[考题1 1] In the history of chinese revolutionary，Taierzhuang
Battle was a--bame in which both sides suffered heavy losses．
A．fierce B．strong C．hot D．peaceful
[解析] 句意为“在中国革命史上，台儿庄战役是一场双方损失惨重的激烈的战斗。”strong表示“强壮的”，hot表示“因火热而激烈的”，均不用于形容战争。D项语义相反。[答案] A
12．recover vt.．恢复；挽回；补救；复原
He was reeovering what was lost．他正在寻找失物。
His health was recoverd．他恢复了健康。
The businessman tried to recover his losses．那位商人试图弥补他的损失。
Trade soon recovered from the efforts of the wars．
贸易摆脱了战争的影响而很快复苏了。
◇[考题12] The team--its lead in the second half．
A．recovered B．restored C．recuperated D．remained
[解析]recover sth．from sb．／sth’．重新获得时间、金钱、地位。句意为“该队在下半场重新领先。”restore侧重于用他力恢复原状：recuperate侧重从疲劳、疾病、损失中恢复。f答案] A
13．free from不受……的影响,免于…;免除…..,摆脱…..
She was free from all blame for the accident.
那次事故完全不能怪她。
It was once a beautiful city free from pollution.
过去这是一个美丽无污染城市。
I freed the bird from the cage.我把笼子里的那只鸟放出来了.
注:free of 无……的,摆脱……的
This booklet is free of charge.这本小册子是免费.
◇[考题13]一What about the protection?
--Let’s keep the surface--dirty by putting a cover over it．
A．far from B．free from C．apart from D．away from
[解析] A项意为“相距较远”，c项意为‘‘离开”，D项意为离开,与题干中用遮盖物来避免灰尘影响这一信息搭配不佳。[答案] B
14．disease ,illness与sickness的区别
disease是泛指任何疾病，全身的或个别器官的、任何原因引起的，尤指传染病或诸如心脏病、癌症等严重疾病。可用于比喻义，可用作可数名词和不可数名词;i11ness是一般用词、泛指 一切疾病，多指生病的状态和有病期间，无沦长短或轻重，比较正式,常作可数名词.
He has a history of heart disease．他有心脏病史。
He’s suffering from a serious illness．他生了一场大病.
◇[考题14] Violent crime is one of the most serious___of moder society．
A．illnesses Bdiseases C．sickness D．pains
[解析] 本题测试“疾病”的同义词辨析问题。sickness是一般用词，基本与illness同义，多抽象地指疾病和患病期间，还可指晕船、恶心、呕吐等，常用作单数形式。本题中使用一种比喻义，表示“痼疾”。又如：
Rough seas caused mach sickness among the passengers．
汹涌的海浪使许多旅客都呕吐了。[答案] B
15. as if 的两种用法
(1) as if引起从句作状语或表语(常放在act ,look ,sound ,smell,feel等后)从句中的动词一般用虚拟语气，有时也用自然语气。
He acted as if nobody was around.他旁若无人。
I’ve loved you as if you were my son．
我爱你，就像你是我儿子一样。
It’s cloudy．It looks as if it is going to rain．
天阴沉沉的。看起来像要下雨。
(2)当从句主语同句子主语一致，从句谓语动词中又包含动词be时，这个主语和be可省略。
He paused as if(he was)expecting me to speak．
他停了一下好像在等我
◇[考题15] when a pencil is partly in a class of water，it looks as if--．(全国高考题)
A．breaks B．has broken C．were bIloken D．had been broken
[解析] 句意为“当铅笔的一部分放在水中时，它看起来断了。”
实际上，我们知道，铅笔根本未断，这个现象是光的折射造成的。因此 as if后面的从句要用虚拟语气动词形式；但D项表示的动作过去发生．不符合题意。[答案] C。
16．现在完成进行时与现在完成时的区别
现在完成进行时和现在完成时都可以表示最近发生的、对现在产生结果的动作和情况，但是二者的重要区别是：现在完成进行时着意于动作或情况的本身，把它看作是一种继续的、延续的活动(不一定是结束了的)，而现在完成时则更看重动作的完成和目前产生的结果。试比较：
I must have a bath．I’ve been gardening all afternoon．
我一定得洗个澡，整个下午我都在花园里干活。(着意于继续不断的活动)
I’ve planted a lot of new rose bushes
我已经种了许多丛玫瑰。(着意于
I’ve been reading your book．
我一直在读你的书。(着意于继续不断努力)
I’ve read your book．我读过了你的书。(着意于完成)
◇[考题16]
(1)一Hi，Tracy，you look tired．
--I am tired．I--the living room all day．(全国高考题)
A．painted B．had painted
C．have been painting D．have painted
[解析] 从句末的时间状语是表示一段时间的all day来看，我油漆起居室工作一直在进行，甚至在说话时以及以后仍有可能继续，所以应使用现在完成进行时来表示。[答案] C
(2)Often，when he--something that--him，he wasted his time drawing 1ittle pictures．(大连八中双基测试题)
A．should be doing；gave B．should have been doing was given
C．should do；was given D．should have been doing；had given
[解析】 第二空要用被动式，所以A、D两项被排除；从、wasted可知“他理应做事”发生在过去，因此应该用should have been doing表示。[答案] B
17．imagine，appreciate的用法及其他
(1)imagine与appreeiate后面接动词时，要接v-ing形式。
Can you imagne living without electricity?
你能想象没有电的生活吗?
Mary can’t imagine(her)marrying a man of that sort
玛丽难以想象(她)嫁给那种男人后的情形。
I greatly appreciate your helping me．我非常感谢你帮了我的忙。
(2)常见的只能接v一ing形式作宾语的词或词组有：raind，enjoy，imagine，miss，escape，insist on，be worth，be used to，understand，can’t help，consider(考虑)，avoid，finish，devote．．．to，look forward to等
◇[考题17]
(1)she looks forward every spring to--the flowerlined garden．(上海高考题)
A．visit B．paying a visit C．walk in D．walking in
(2)The time he has devoted in the past ten years--the disabled is now considered--of great value．(南京质检题)
A．to help；being B．to helping；to be
C．help；to be D．helping；being
[解析] (1)1ook forward to中的to为介词，因此它后面的动词应,用v-ing形式。若选B，则a visit后要加to。(2)第一空测试devote．．to的用法，介词to后用v-ing形式；第二空与consider的用法相关。作“考虑”讲，后接v-ing形式，但本题测试“被当作”用法，后接to be。答案(1)D (2) B
18．修饰可数／不可数名词有哪些词或词组
(1)a great deal of
(2)a large amotmt of 修饰不可数名词
(3)much／little
(4)a great／good many
(5)a numberer of 修饰可数名词
(6)many/few
(7)plenty of 既可修饰
(8)a lot of／lots of 可数名词
(9)a Iarge quantity of／quantities of 又可修饰
(10)a mass of／masses of 不可数名
(11)some／any 词
[考题18]
(1)In the activities，we received--interesting books and magazines．
A. a great number of B．a great deal of
C．a large amount of D．a good plenty of
(2)-the students have been sent to help cut rice on the farm．
A．A good many B.The number of
C．A great many of D．A great deal of
[解析] (1)所修饰的中心名词为可数名词。(2)所修饰的可数名词前多了一个定冠词the，那么本题含义是“这些学生当中的很多学生”。而a good many后直接接复数名词形式，the number of表示“……的数目’’以及D项只修饰不可数名词均被排除。[答案] (1)A (2)C
19．含break的词组小结
break into破门而入；突然……；打断
break out爆发
break down抛锚；坏了；流产、破裂；中断
break up驱散；分开；拆散
break off 折断,突然终止
break away from脱离；改掉
The thieves planned to break into a bank． 强盗们密谋抢银行。
My ear broke down，so 1 was 1ate． 车子坏了，因此我迟到了。
◇[考题19]
A war broke--．To make things worse,my ear broke
--on the way to escape．
A. out；into B．off；up C．down；away D．out；down
[解析]分析句子意思，很明确地看出来‘‘(战争)爆发，，及(车辆)坏了”两个词组的含义。前者用break out(无被动式)，后者用breakdown(无被动式)。[答案]D
20. via 的用法, prep.凭借,通过,经过,经由
He flew to Washington via New York.他搭机由纽约飞往华盛顿.
The programe was telecast live via satellite.
该节目经由卫星以电视现场转播.
I sent a message to Mary via her sister.
He sent me a love letter via airmail
21. take every chance /take a chance/take chances
冒险一试,碰运气,投机
Come on, and take a chance..You may lose,but it’s worth trying.
来,冒险一试,也许你会失败,但值得尝试.
22.to the full/fullest 充分地,尽情地,非常
He lived his life to the full.他尽情地过了一生.
They displayed to the full their talent and wisdom.
他们充分展现了自己的才华和智慧.
We appreciated to the full our teacher’s help.
23 contract vt.
(1) 感染(疾病),染上(恶习),招致(恶果)
My son has contracted pneumonia. 得了肺炎.
contract …..with …与…订合同,承包……
(2) 收缩
Metals expand when heated and contract when cooled.
金属热胀冷缩.
24．deadly及其派生词 ．
deadly是形容词，意为“致命的”、“彻底的”：dead 是形容词，表示“死了的”；die是动词，表示“死”的动作；death是名词，表示某人的“死讯”或死亡这一事件；dying除作为die的现在分词，还可作形容词，意为“垂死的”，“临终的”。
Cancer is deadly disease．癌症是致命疾病。
They sat in deadly silence．他们在死寂中静坐。
His father has been dead for two years．他父亲死了两年了。
The dying man felt painful． 那个快要死的人感到痛苦。 l
◇[考题24] (1)People there soon came to regard the white settlers as their--enemy．
A．deadly B．dying C．dead D．death
[解析]题干信息为“人们很快就将白人定居者视为他们的死敌。选项B、C均不合语境，D项更不可能用作形容词。[答案]A
(2)He was shot--in a gun fight．
A．deadly B．dying C．death D．dead
[解析] 句意为“他在一次枪战中被击毙。”[答案]D
(3)The great musician--for 3 years．
A．died B．was dying C．has been dead D．has died
[解析]for 3 years表示“一段时间”，不可与短暂动词连用。die为短暂动词，dead才为延续性动词。[答案]C
◇[考题25](1)We hadn’t met for20 years but I recognized him--I saw him．
A．for the moment B．for a moment C．the moment D．at the moment
[解析] 句意为“虽然我们已经有二十年没相见了，但我一看到他我就认出了他。”只有the moment是“一…就”的意思，故选C项。
(2)The number is engaged--．Call again later．
A．any moment B．any minute C．of moment D．at the moment
[解析] any moment／minute随时，马上；of moment重要的；at the moment现在；句意为“这个号现在占线，请稍后再拨。”[答案] D
◇[考题26] (1)His wish that he--so many mistakes in yesterday’s examination is understandable．
A．didn’t make B．should not make
C．doesn’t make D．hadn’t made
[解析] wish作动词用后接宾语从句时，谓语用虚拟语气，但它用于“It is/was wished that．．．”结构的主语从句，以及名词wish后面的同位语从句和表语从句中，谓语动词仍须采用以上三种虚拟语气形式。如：
It is wished(=People wish)that he were still alive．
人们希望他还活着。(He is dead．) [答案] D
(2)-the English examination，I--to the pop concert with you now．
A．In spite of；will go B．Because of；would go
C．But for；would go D．As for；went
[解析] 分析句子大意可知，本题是个虚拟语气句子。词组中只有but for(要不是)可以引导；且对现在进行虚拟(句中时间状语为now)。[答案]C
教材课后习题解答j
Textbook Word study 1．(1)infected(2)incurable(3)discouraged(4)defenseless,
2．(1)proper (2)disease (3)lack (4)cheer
(5)persuade(6)cure (7)available (8)prevents
Grammar
1(2)It’s a great pity that she isn’t here with me and we’re sick.
(3)It’s a great pity that people won't find out the facts and act as if I am a bad or dangerous person
(4)It’s a great pity that I am not you，so 1 won’t give an AIDS patient a hug．
(5)It’s a great pity that I don’t have HIV．so 1 won’t know because 1 won’t feel sick．
2(1)1 wish I could have a big birthday cake on my birthday．
(2)1 wish I could go to see the meteor storm with her．
(3)1 wish I had a magic lamp．
3(1)1 wish I could solve my problems．
(2)1 wish you hadn’t been working too hard．
(3)1 wish I could forget the terrible scene．
(4)1 wish we had got enough money．
(5)1 wish the performance would go well．
(6)1 wish I had many friends
4(1)If I had enough money，I would buy these books．
(2)If it were not cold and wet outside,we would leave the children play in the garden．
(3)If I were you，I wouldn’t be wasting so much time to play computer games．
(4)If he didn’t have to work hard all day long，he would have time to do the shopping．
5(1)If I were a famous person for a day,I would make many wise decisions．
(2) If I were invisible for a day，I would visit that secret laboratory．
(3)If I had a lot of money,I would hire a spaceship and go to visit the moon．
(4)If I could change one thing about me，I would make me grow taller. l
(5)If I were the teacher，I would not punish that careless boy．
6．(1)Sarah 1ooks at her husband as if he were a stranger
(2)They are talking as if they were friends．
(3)Mr Hammer speaks to me as if I were a kid．
(4)I remember the whole thing as if it happened yesterday．
Workbook
Vocabulary
1．(1)C (2)D (3)A (4)B (5)B (6)A (7)C (8)A (9)D (10)C
Grammar
1．(1)were to do (2)wuold call (3)were (4)had
(5)were (6)could go (7)had had (8)would stop
2(1)I would have the same feeling．
(2)t}lat were not true．
(3)1 would follow the doctor's advice／do as the doctor said．
(4)would be／become more anxious．
(5)what my life would be like．
(6)I could live longer to study，play and enjoy life with you／so that I could study with you,play with you and enjoy with you the happiness in life．
单元知识梳理与能力整合
一、重点单词
meaningful virus proper illness radiation deadly heroin boyfriend via discourage liquid fighter imaginary immune identify mosquito cheer contrary infect transfusion billionaire prevention transmit visible stranger
persuade network unprotected sample route defensive weep cell defenseless specialist sex disrupt donation diagnose chemical treatment lack contagious cocaine
二、词汇拓展
1．dead-death(n．)一die(v．)一deadly(adj.)致命的
2．imaginary(adj.)--imagine(v.)---imagination(m)
3．defenseless---defense(n．)一defensive(adj.)一defend(v)
4．discourage---courage(n．)_+encourage(v)
5．meaningful---meaning(n)-+mean(v)
6．prevention---prevent(v)
7．Treatment---treat(v.)
三、重点短语 ．
1．1ive with… 接受或容忍
2．take notes of 作记录
3．miIlions of 几百万的
4．break down 打破；毁掉；坏掉
5．immune system 免疫系统
6．in one's case 至于；就……来说
7．die of 死于
8．not…until 直到……才
9．take care of 照顾；照看
10．the total number of 总数为…… ．
11．a lack of 缺少……
12．much too．．． 非常；太……
13．have a chance to do 有机会做……
14．spend…in doing 花(时间，金钱等)做某事
15．cheer…up (使)感到振奋
16．suffer from 患……病；受…之苦
17．deal with 处理；对付；消除18．find out 查清
19．as if 好像……
20．give sb．a hug 拥抱某人
21take sb．to hospital带某人去住院
22．a great many很多；大量的，极多
23．take samples of 采样
24．go to end 完结，结束
25．at the wrong time 在错误的时候
26 on the contrary 相反地
27 keep sb．from doing 阻止……做某事
28．to the fullest 完美
29．belong to 属于 3
0．be afraid of 害怕
31．know about 了解
32．take a chance 利用机会，碰碰运气
四、句型与交际
1．I think that…-because…
2．First．…
3．One reason is that…
4．For example…．
5．If we／they were to．．．．we／they could．．．
6．Perhaps，but what if/about…?
7．Have you thought about…?
8．What makes you think that…?
9．Could you please explain…?
10．If I were you．I would．．．
11．after having(been)done
12．1 wish I could remember…
13…．there is(no)reason why-clause．
14．I remember having an empty feeling…
15．first…then．．．
五、语法：as if及wish引导的虚拟语气
1.as if 引导的虚拟语气
时态 从句
对过去进行虚拟 (as if)+主语+had done
对现在进行虚拟 (as if)+主语+did／were／was
对将来进行虚拟 (as if)+主语+would／could do sth．
2 wish引导的虚拟语气
时态 从句
对过去进行虚拟 (wish)+主语+had done
对现在进行虚拟 (wish)+主语+did／were
对将来进行虚拟 (wish)+主语+would／could do
高考题剖析
[例1]Taking a plane is the qulekest--to get to Tibet．
A．mode B．manner C．means D．method
[解析] 句意为“乘坐飞机去西藏是最快的方法。”四个选项及与way都可表示“方式，方法”.means指整套的方法或使用某些工具、材料、交通工具等；mode指习俗或爱好所养成的思考、行为、说话、协作等方面的习惯方式；manner指个人特殊的行事或处理问题的方法；method指具体、系统有步骤的方法，强调理性及高效率；way为常用语，既可指具体方法。又可指抽象方法；既可指一般的方法，又可指个人独特的方式。[答案] C
[例2] (安徽春季高考)The man we followed suddenly stopped and looked as if--whether he was going in the right direction．
A．seeing B．having seen C．to have seen D．to see
[解析] 表题考查as if引导的表语从句中的省略用法。此句中从句与主句的主语一致，从句中主语及动词be可省略。句意为“我们跟踪的那个男人，突然停下来，看上去好像是去判断是否走对了方向．．”由题意得知，他停下来的目的好像是为了辨别是否走对了方向，故用动词不定式。C项虽然也是动词不定式，但它表示的是已完成的动作，不合题意；A、B两项是现在分词表示正在进行的动作，显然不合语境。试比较：From time to time he turned round as though (he were /was ) searching for someone.
[例3] (20上海高考)Words______ me when I wanted to express my thanks to him for having saved my son from the buming house．
A．failed B．1eft C discouraged D disappointed
[解析] 句意为“当我想表达对他从失火的房子里救出我儿子的谢意时,我却说不出话来。”fail处意为“缺少，缺乏”，words failed me意为“我说也说不出来”，或译为“我找不到适当言辞”。leave'‘留下”，后常双宾语；discourage是本单元学习的一个单词。意为“使气馁，使沮丧”；disappoint“使失望”。
[例4] (20上海高考)As a result of destroying the forests a large__________of desert covered the land.
A．number；has B．quantity；has
Cnumber have D. quantity ,have
[解析] 本题考查固定搭配及主谓一致。因desert为不可数名词，故不能用a large number of(因其后要跟可数名词复数.)因本题的主语是单数,故谓动用has.
例5 ---Shall I buy the house?
-----If I ____you,I ______buy it.
A．were；wouldn’t B．were；won't
C．am；wouldn't D．was；mustn't
[解析] 本题考查虚拟语气在虚拟条件句中的应用.注意辨别if引导的真实条件句和if引导的虚拟条件句的区别。答案 A
[例6 Wang Fang--to co1lege last year．unfortunately，she couldn’t take the examinations because of a sudden illness.
A．could go B．did go
C. could have gone D. must have gone
[解析] 本题考查虚拟语气。首先应明确could go与could have gone所表示的时间概念。该题常错选A项或D项。情态动词(should，could ,might，ought)+不定式的完成式．表示“过去本应该(本可以……)做某件事，而实际上并未做”的含义。情态动词could+动词原形，表示“过去将要去做”或“过去能做的事”。must+动词不定式的完成式，表示“一定做过了”。句意为“王芳去年本可以上大学，不幸的是，因一场突然的病,她未能参加考试.答案 C
7．(年福建高考题)
一How do you--we go to Beijing for our holidays?
-I think we'd better fly there．It's much more comfortable．
A．insist B．want C．suppose D．suggest
[解析] 从We go可知中间省略了should，四个动词中除D项外A项也有此用法，但语义不对。答案 D
8．(20全国高考题)News reports say peace talks between the
two countries--with no agreement reached．
A．have broken down B．have broken out
C．have broken in D．have broken up
[解析]从语境看，所缺词组的含义应为“(谈判、计划等)破裂：流产”。
[答案]A
9．(年上海高考题)The young dancers 1ooked so channing in their beautiful clothes that we took--pictures of them．
A．many of B．masses of
C．the number of D．a large amount of
[解析]picture为可数名词，所以应由修饰可数名词的词组来修饰，而masses of(=a mass of)既可修饰可数名词又可修饰不可数名词。A项中of多余，C项不合题意，D项只修饰不可数名词。[答案] B
10．(年上海高考题)I really appreciate--to relax with you on this nice island．
A．to have had time B．having time
C．to have time D．to having time
[解析]appreciate后接动名词作宾语。这句话的意思是“我真的喜欢和你一起在这个迷人的小岛上放松一下。”答案] B
11．(2001年上海春季高考题)Mr．Reed made up his mind to devote all he had to--some schoo1s for poor children．
A．set up B．setting up C．have set up D．having set up
[解析] to devote sth．to后接动名词作宾语。实际上，all he had作devoted的宾语，是一个宾语从句。这句话的意思是“利德先生决定用自己所有的一切为贫困儿童建造几所学校。”[答案] B
12．(上海高考题)While shopping，people sometimes can’t help--into buying something they don’t really need．
A．to persuade B．persuading
C．being persuaded D．be persuaded
[解析]can’t help doi趣stll．表示“情不自禁地做桌事”，又因为此处people与persuade之间存在动宾关系，所以persuade应用被动式，所以可以排除A、B、D三个选项。[答案] C
13．(上海高考题)Without the air to hold some of the sun's heat，the earth at night--，too cold for us to live．
A．would be freezing cold B．will be freezing coldly
C．would be frozen co1d D．can freeze coldly
[解析] 此题涉及常识，大家都知道，事实上地球上空气是存在的，所以本题应用虚拟语气。另外，freezing在这里是very的意思，所以C对。
改错：
Dentists always ask questions when it is impossible of 56--
you to answer．My dentist had just pulled one of 57--．
my tooth and had told me to have a rest for a while．I 58--
managed to say something，but my mouth was full of 59--
cotton wool。He knew I collected match boxes and asked 60--
me whether my collection was grown．He then asked me 6l-
how my brother was and I liked my new job in London． 62--
In answer to these questions，I either nodded nor made 63．--
strange noises．When the dentist at last removed off 64．--
the cotton wool from my mouth，I am able to tell him
that he had pulled out the wrong tooth． 65--
答案:56 of---for 57 pull后加out pull out 为拔出,58 tooth---teeth 59 magaged---tried 60 .√ 61.grown 改为growing.这里不应用被动,而是表示过去进行时态. 62. I 前加whether/if. 询问我 “是否”喜欢在伦敦的新工作. 63.nor 改为 or. either… or 为固定结构.64.去掉 off .remove 是及物动词. 65.am --- was
单 元 检 测 题
一. 单项填空
1 He is used to collective life and feels--whan he is left--．
A．1onely；lonely B alone；alone
C．1onely；alone D．a1one；lonely
2 It might be dangerous，but that’s the chance you have to--，sir．
A．make B．take C．fetch D．hold
3--Did John ask you to play tennis this Saturday?
____-Yes，but 1 wish it_______ raining before tomorrow．
A. stops B. stopped C .will stop D. would stop
4You do live very far,but--no reason--you can't be in time for schoo1．
A．there’s；why B．there’s；which
C．it’s；why D．it’s；which
5 I felt sick this morning and my mum iminediately took me to hospital to--．
A．have me to examine B．have examined me
C．have me examined D．have to examine me
6 It’s no use tring to--him to give up smoking；he won’t listen．
A．persuade B．advise C．discourage D．prevent
7一You don’t like football，do you?
--，I like it very much．
A．Not at all B．0n the contrary
C．Next to never D．0n all sides
8一Do you know Edward Wilson?
--The name sounds fami1iar but I don’t remember--him．
A．to meet B．meeting
C．that I have ever met D．of having met
9 You'd better give the plant a bit of water every now and than to keep it--too dry．
A．to get B．got C．getting D．from getting
10 Many companies give away small quantities of their produce as--，so that people can try tham before buying them．
A．experiences B．experiments C．examples D．samples
11一Cars moved very slowly in the 1920’s．
--Yes，but，they--more quickly than in 1910．
A．did move B．were to move C．should move D．had moved
12 From time to time a wave burst over the boat and swept over him,but he kept_____ for ten minutes．
A．to work B．to working C．working D．on work
13 He had to take the medicine three times a day,so as to be--pain in the leg．
A．far from B．away from C．apart from D．free from
14 Many new--will be opened up in the future for those with a university education．
A．opportunities B．necessities
C．realities D．possibi1ities
15 In her body，cells either divide too fast or at the wrong time，_______it difficult for the body to function properly．
A．made B．making
C．to make D．having made
二 完形填空
Some people cannot learn in ordinary schools．Physical or l handicap(残疾)prevents a child from 1earning．Today new 2 are being used in special schoo1s to help the disabled learn．
A school is being 3 in New Jersey，U.S．A．It is called Bancroft．Here the disabled will be trained to 4 themselves and to get along in the outside world．
Bancroft is not surrounded by 5 of any kind．Its director insists that it be 6 so that students may gradually develop normal relations with the rest of the world．Bancroft students will 7 in apartments，cooking their own meals，and learning to perform other-8-．As they become -9-， they will buy their own furniture，paying for it out of their own earnings．They will pay for their food，too．They will learn to expect 10 bills for the calls they make every month．
As a step toward the goal of becoming-11 ，each disabled person will decide what kind of work he wants to be l 2 to do．While some of the training will be carried on within Bancroft itself，most of the students wi1l receive 1 3 training in nearby towns．They will be trained by town people．
After the training has been 14 completed，the student wiIl work as an assistant and wi11 begin to earn money．After that he wi1l leave Bancroft，-15 the school wnl continue to give him help if he 16 it．
How long will it take a student to 1 7 his training under this new system?The director says．“For some a year will be 18 ．For others it might take ten years．”For all，however，this method offers new 1 9 ．Many will learn to be 20 and independent，supporting themselves in the world．
1 A．spi rit B．mental C．thought D．body
2 A．plans B．decisions C．tools D．methods
3 A．turned up B．set up C．searched forD．1onged for
4 A．enjoy B．teach C．help D．support
5 A．trainers B．students C．trees D．walls
6 A free B．open C．quiet D．different
7 A．1ive B．study C．hide D．cook
8 A．operations B．tasks C．plays D．acts
9 A．strong B．health C．able D．happy
10 A．telephone B．education C．housing D．food
11A．brave B．clever C．1earned D．independent
12 A．asked B．sent c．trained D．made
13 A．1ife B．job c．body D．mind
14 A．successfully B．gradually C．quickly D．hardly
15 A．and B．but c．so D．or
16 A．needs B．asks c．gets D．offers
17 A．receive B．get c．complete D．stop
18 A．short B．enough c．good D．1ong
19 A．ideas B．abilities c．time D．work
20 A．helpful B．careful c．useful D．cheerful
三.阅读理解
A
40 years ago the idea of disabled people doing sport was never heard of．But when the yearly games for the disabled were started at Stoke Mandeville,England in 1948 by Sir Ludwig Guttmann，the situation began to change．
Sir Ludwig Guttmann，who had been driven to England in1939 from Nazi Germany，had been asked by the British government to set up an injuries centre at Stoke Mandevnle Hospital near London．His ideas about treating injuries included sport for the disabled．
In the first games just two teams of injured soldiers took part．The next year，1 949，five teams took part．From those beginnings，things have developed fast．Teams now come from abroad to Stoke Mandeville every year．In 1960 the first Olympics for the Disabled were held in Rome，in the same place as the normal Olympic Games．Now，every four years the Olympic Games for the Disabled are held，if possible，in the same place as the normal Olympic Games，although they are organized separately．In other years Games for the Disabled are still held at Stoke Mandeville．In the 1984 wheelchair,Olympic Games，1064 wheelchair athletes(运动员)from about
40 countries took part．Unfortunately，they were held at Stoke Mandevine and not in Los Angeles，along with the other Olympics．
The Games have been a great success in helping the progress of international friendship and understanding，and in proving that being disabled does not mean you can't enjoy sport．0ne small source(来源)of disappointment for those who organize and take part in the games，however,has been the unwillingness of the International Olympic Committee(委员会)to include disabled events at the Olympic Games for the
able-bodied．Perhaps a few more years are stnl needed to persuade those fortunate enough not to be disabled that their disabled fellow athletes should be included．
1.The first games for the disabled were held--after Sir Ludwig Guttmann arrived in England．
A．40 years B．21 years C．10 years D．9 years
2.Besides stoke Mandeville，surely the games for the disabled were once held in--．
A．New York B．London C．Rome D．Los Angeles
3.This text tells us that Sir Ludwig Guttmann--．
A．is an early organizer of the games for the able-bodied．
B．is welcomed by the British government
C．is an injured soldier
D．is from England
4.From the passage，we may know that the writer is______
A．one of the organizers of the games for the disabled
B．a disabled person who once took part in the games
C．against ho1ding the games for the disabled
D．in favour of holding the games for the disabled
B
Eddie is a handicapped child．He was functionally(官能地)blind and deaf in one ear．
In spite of his inborn disability，Eddie seems to have a good sense of music．His mother knows that and bought him a toy piano for Christmas．
At church that day，Eddie listened silently wh|le the rest of the family sang along with the music．As soon as he returned home，he flung himself at the little piano．He seemed angry at it as he produced only noise，so his mother put it in the closet．Two weeks later，returning from a church service once more，Eddie uttered his first words，“Mommy，piano，piano．”This time he started to play every hymn(圣歌)he had heard in church．A1l his family members looked at each other in surprise．“Eddie plays the piano，”they say．
Since then Eddie has been taught by a young piano teacher from a university．Now he can perform classic music by Mozart and Schumann．He has learned to read music．He also plays jazz，pop and background music he hears on television shows．“The boy has a bright future，”his teacher says．
1“A handicapped child is a child who--．
A．has no hands B．has a disability
C．is blind in one eye D．is deaf in one ear
2.The toy piano was given to him--．
A．as a birthday present B．as a Christmas present
C by his father D . at the church
3 At church that day Eddie--．
A．sang with his family
B．ran about playing
C．1istening silently to the music
D．danced with the rest of his family.
4 Which of the following is true?
A． After returning from the church，Eddie at once played the piano and he played very well．
B．When Eddie got home，he got angry because he heard nothing at church．
C．After returning home，Eddie shouted and made a 1ot of noise．
D．Eddie could play the music when he returned from the church the second time．
5.According to what his teacher said，Eddie--．
A．will play not better in the future
B．will be successful in the future
C．must go to college for further study
D．must be given a real piano as a present
C
A Child Who Could Not See．Hear，Or Speak For the first nineteen months of her Iife．Helen Keller was like other
pretty happy babias in every way．Then a sudden i11ness destroyed her sight and hearing．Because she could not hear what other people were saying，the child could not learn to speak．For the next seven years。she lived in a world of darkness,without sounds or words.
The person who changed Helen’s world was her teacher.Anne Sullivan，who entered her life on March 3，1887．MissSullivan had accepted a job which seemed imposm‘ble．She had agreed to teach a blind child who had never learned to act like a human being，because no one had ever been able to guide her in any way．No one could control Helan．She acted like young animal，rushing wildly around，throwing things，and hitting anyone whom she could reach．Who could believe that such a child could be taught?
But Anne Sullivan was a very special kind of teacher．She had been blind during part of her own chndhood and had learned to read Braille，a system of writing that uses raised dots which can be felt by the fingers of a blind person．She had learned to see again after several operations，but she had never forgotten the experience of being blind．
Miss Sullivan understood Helen．She loved her and believed she could teacher．Anne Sullivan could not teach Helan Keller to speak untill some other important things had been learned．The little girl had to learn to control her actions and feelings．She had to learn that she could not always do what
she wished to do．She had always been able to get what she wanted by using force．The teacher had to change such habits without breaking the child’s spirit．
Miss Sullivan’s battle began．Sometimes，there was real fighting between the wild chi1d and the strong young teacher．At last，however，the battle was won by Miss Sullivan，who had succeeded in showing Helan that she loved her and wanted to help her．The chnd and her teacher became friends．They continued to be friends untn the teacher’s death，fifty years later．
The day on which Helan finally accepted Miss Sullivan as her friend and teacher was a great day in Helan’s life．After that．the teacher could begin to teach the child language．
1.Helen Keller acted like a wild animal for she--．
A．had never had a teacher
B．could not understand any words
C．had never learned to know the world around
D．could not hear anyone speak
2--，Sullivan believed she could teach Helen．
A．Being a blind person herself
B．Having learned Braille when she was young
C．Having been specially trained to be a teacher
D．Knowing how a blind child feels
3 Helan--and so she could neither hear nor learn to speak．
A．1ost her hearing at an early age
B．had disease with her ears and tongue
C．1ost her ability in hearing and speaking
D．did not know any words
4 The most important thing for Helen was that she should learn____ ．
A．not always to use force
B．to keep her spirit from breaking
C．to tell what was wrong and what was right
D．not to get angry again
5 Sullivan won the battle--．
A．because she was stronger than Helan
B．by helping Helan understand why they fought
C．through fighting until she beat Helen
D．through real fighting and beating
D
Lisa is ten years old．She is handicapped(残疾)because she has brain damage．She could not do even the most simple thing unti1 a year ago．She could not comb(梳理)her hair or feed herself．Her parents loved her．But they treated her like a baby．
Mr． Ching has a daughter and a son．They are both grown．They live far from their father．Mr．Ching felt 1onely．He decided to do something about it．He decided to become a foster grandfather to a handicapped chnd．And that was how he met Lisa．
Foster grandparents are grandparents who are not related by birth，but foster grandparents 1ove the children they care for．They love them j ust as natural grandparents love their grandchidren．
The foster grandparents also help the handicapped children in special ways．They help to dress and feed the chiidren．They read to them and tell them stories．They also help with handicapped children’s therapy．Therapy is the treatment of a disease or disorder．It helps the children overcome their handicaps．
Mr．Ching became a foster grandparent to Lisa when she was nine years old．At first，Lisa was shy．She was afraid because Mr．Ching was a stranger．But he came to see her everyday．GraduaIly，she began to trust him．
At 1ast Lisa let Mr.Ching do things for her．He came at lunchtime and fed her．0ne day he handed the spoon(匙子)and guided it to her mouth．He told her she must 1earn to feed herself．
“Most of that lunch anded up on us instead of in Lisa’s mouth，”Mr．Ching remembers．“But it was a start for Lisa．She learned to feed herself in a few months．”
Then Lisa was ready for more therapy，thanks to Mr.Ching．She had learned to do one simple thing．She could learn to do other simple things．Mr． Ching was trained to help with Lisa’s therapy．
To become foster grandparents，people must be at least sixty years old and in good health．They must be willing to give their time to handicapped children．They are volunteers(志愿者)，so they are not paid．They are giyen money for expenses sueh as transportation．
Mr．Ching speaks for most foster grandparents when he says，“We all benefit(受益)．The handicapped children benefit because we help them live more useful lives．And we benefit because we know the children need us and love us．For any person，there’s no greater happiness than that!”
1 Why did Lisa need help?
A．She was a baby．
B．She did got want to do anything．
C．She had brain damage．
D．She was a blind girl．
2 How oftan did Mr．Ching visit Lisa?
A．Every day． B．Every other day．
C．Every week． D．Twice a wee k．
3 Which five things do foster grandparents do for handicapped children?
a．1ove them b．dress them c．1ive in their homes d．feed tham
e．charge them money f．read to them g tell them stories
h．make fun of them
A．a，b，d，e，f B．a，c，e，f，h
C．b，c，d，f，g D．a，b，d，f，g
4 What does the word“foster'”mean?
A．Elderly． B．Related by birth．
C．Not related bv birth． D．Kind-hearted．
5 How did Lisa first feel toward Mr．Ching?
A．Shy． B．Friendly． C．Angry． D．Happy．
E
It is estimated(估计)that some seven handred million people--about half the world’s adult population--are unable to read or write，and there are probably two hundred and fifty million more whose level is so slight that it barely(勉强)qualfies(称得上)as literacy(有文化)．
Recently the attack on illiteracy had been stepped up．A world plan has been drawn up by a committee of UNESCO experts in Paris，as part of the United Nations Develdpment Decade(十年计划)，and an international conference of the subiect has also been held．UNESCO stresses that functional(官能的)literacy is the aim．People must learn the basic skills
of responm’ble citizenship；the ability to read notices，newspapers，timetables，1etters，price-lists to keep simple records and accounts，to sort out the signil‘icance of the information gathered--and to fill in forms．
The major areas of illiteracy are in Asia，Africa，and Central and South America．In Africa there are at least one hundred million illiterates，which is eighty to eighty-five percent of the total population．In Europe the figure is about twenty-four million；most of them are in Southern Europe．With Spain，Italy，Portugal，and Yugoslavia heading the list(the United Kingdom has about seven hundred thousand)．
It is urgent(迫切的)for each country in the world,whether poor or rich，to wipe out illiteracy．
1.The figure of illiteracy in Britain is ．
A o.1％of that of illiteracy in the world
B．o.2％of the world's adult population
C．35％of Europe's population
D．3．5％of that of the illiteracy in Southern Europe
2.A world plan mentioned in the passage aims at ．
A．training responsible citizens B．enforcing the functions of UNESCO
C．helping illiterates learn how to read and write
D．asking Southern European countries to take the lead in attacking illiteracy
3.The author implies(暗示)that this world plan is to_______ ．
A．be carried out in the maj’or areas of illiteracy like Mrica
B．be realized in ten years
C．be drawn up by Parisian experts
D．be discussed at an international conference
4.According to the passage，which country has the most illiterates?
A．France． B．The U．S．A．C．Spain． D．England．
§6．4短文改错
I can't swim because I have a strong fear of water．
Look back at my childhood experience，I think 1. ____．
that three reason might explain the fear．The first reason 2．--
is that 1 was not allowed to go near the water 3_____
when 1 was a child．for my mother had unreasonable 4．--
fear of it．So，even as a child I was taught see the 5______
water as something danger．Second,my eyes became 6．--
bad ones when I was five．If I took off my glasses in the 7．--
water，I couldn't see anything。but this increased my 8______
fear．The worst part of your experience is that as a 9_____．
child of ten I see a neighbor drown．Since then I 10_____．
have been more frightened．
§6．5书面表达
今天是7月5日(星期三)。早晨风雨交加，在上学的路上发生了这样一件事：
你校一名少先队员张雷在街道的拐角处，准备穿过马路时，看个盲人正穿过马路，这时一辆卡车飞驰而来，张雷奋不顾身地冲过去救了他。然后张雷匆匆忙忙赶往学校，她告诉了老师在路上发生的事情，老师表扬了她。
根据此情景用英语写一篇日记。词数90左右。
§6．1单项填空
1.c 2．B 3．D 4．A 5．c 6．A 7．B 8．B 9．D
10．D 11．A 12．c 13．D 14．A 15．B
§6．2完形填空 I
1．B 2．D 3．B 4．D 5．D 6．B 7．A 8．B 9．c
10．A 11．D 12．c 13．B 14?
篇4：NSEFC 高二英语教案学案一体化 unit 4
UNIT 4 A garden of poems
教学目的和要求
(teachering aims and demands)
类别 课程标准要求掌握的项目
话题 1．Talking about English poetry2．Talking about literature and poetry
词汇 poem poet intention recite mad pattern dialogue sort fantasy loneliness sadness grammar glory absence district atmosphere introduction translate translation tale shade extraordinary idiom dust crow apart essay recommend contribute
put…together play with call up stand out the Lake district light up come into being send for contribute to…
功能 表达意图(Expressing intention)I'm interested to…but… I think it will be too difficult to…I think I might want to..． I think it will be boring…1 want to… I'm very interested in…so…I’d like to… I'm not very interested in…so…I've never heard of…so… I hope to find…I've never read any…so… I don't know much about…
语法 过去分词(短语)作状语Frightened by the noise in the night，the girl no longer dared to sleep in her room.Folded in his pocket，the letter wasn't found until twenty years later．Given better attention，the crops would grow better．Although recommended by the doctor, she refused to have all operation.
LISTENING TEST(课文)
A Dialogue between a librarian and a student
S: Hello. Could you help me, please? I want to read some poems.
L: Have you read any poetry before?
S: Yes, we read some at school, but I didn’t like it very much. I want to find something nice.
L: There are different ways to choose a poem. If you have a favorite writer,
You can choose a book with his or her poems, but if you don’t know any names, you’d better start with books that are collections of poems. In such books you usually find poems by different writes. You see here’s a book called A GARDEN OF POEMS, or this one, 1001 Songs and poems in English.
S; Should I read all those poems?
L: No, don’t worry. What most people do is to go though them until you see a poem that you like. Maybe you like the title，or the topic, or you might like the first or last lines of the poem.
S:I see. What else have you got?
L: Some books bring together the work of writers from a certain period of time.you see, Enlish Poems of the Early Seventeenth Century of Poetry between the World Wars. Other books have poems about a certain topic. The topic can ben human feelings, such as humour or love. There is also poetry about nature, you can look for poems about flowers, trees and plants or about the sea or the countryside .so, what would you like to read?
S:Idon’t know. Shakespeare, mabybe?
L:I think Shakespeare is a little bit difficult for you. It’ll be easier if you choose something modern. What kind of topic would you like?
S:I like reading about nature.
L: Have a look at this book. It’s called The Earth is Painted Green. If you have any more questions, you can come and ask me.
S: Yes, I’ll do that. Thank you very much for your help.
ANSWERS to EXERCISE 1:
Poem, the SEA, collection, nature, the Word Wars, countryside, gardens.
ANSWERS to EXERCISE 2:
1 The dialogue is about a girl/student who is looking for some poems to read.
2 It’s a collection of poems.
3 From 1914 to 1918.
4 You should not read all the poems but go though them and only read these which you like from looking at the title, the topic or the first or last lines.
5 She likes reading about nature.
LISTENING TEXT(课后)
People invented poetry as a help to remember things. Before the invention of writing there was no other way to remember important things. People early discovered that rhyme and rhythm were very helpful when they were trying to remember things .So, they made poems to help them remember all the things very needed to know and pass on from generation to generation .For example, to remember their history they recited great stories about their ancestors and the wars that were fought. But people also needed to remember practical things such a where to find good caves to sleep, where to find water that could be drunk or when to plant crops.
We no longer need poetry to remember things. But that doesn’t mean that we shouldn’t use it to help us remember and learn things better. In fact, there are a number of quite famous short poems that can help us with things that are difficult to remember.
We can learn and remember important dates in history using rhyme .The most famous of these is:”In fourteen~ninety~two, Columbus sailed the ocean blue.” To remember that it was in 1492 that Columbus discovered the Americas. There are also short rhymes to remember how many days each month has.30days has September,April, June, and November.All the rest have 31.Fine!February 28 except when 29.
We can even learn how to spell English words from a short poem .The word “receive” sounds like “believe”, but the spelling is not the same. Listen to the following short poem .It is very useful to help students learn and remember how to spell some difficult words in English and it always works.I before e except after c Or when sounding like a As in neighbour and weigh
ANSWERS to EXERCISE 1
1 The use of poetry as a help to remember things.
2 To help them remember their history and practical things.
3 Because we can write things down / Because writing was invented.
4 Student/we/people of today do.
ANSWERS to EXERCISE 2:
1 sailed the ocean blue; remember the year columbus discovered America
2 has September; April,June;November; have 31;February 28 except ;remember which months have 31 days ,which have 30days and how many days February has
3 I; e; c; a; neighbour; weigh; remember when to write ei and when to write ie. (Or: remember how to spell words such as receive, believe, neighbour and weigh.)
细枝末节
(Passage 1)
1.John Milton's work became famous for______ ．
A．his work is exactly written with sounds，words and grammar
B．his work calls up the feelings，curious images of a
C．his work has a special pattern pf rhyme at the end of each line
D．none of the above
2.The style and atmosphere in Shelley’poems is just like the poems of______ ．
A. Marvell and Donne
B.Li Bai and Du Fu
C.Auden and Robert Frost
D.John Milton
3.From the passage，we got the idea(s)_______ ．
A．poetry belongs to all human beings
B．poetry plays with sounds，words and grammar
C．poetry often follows special patterns of rhythm and rhyme
D．all of the above
(
Passage 2)
4.I like song words because______．
A．they are bright
B．they are colorful
C．they are greedy
D．my feelings given by them are more special
5.Choose the best explanation of the word“e-pal”．
A.a machine
B.a person
C．a piece of information
D．a friend online
6.From Paragraph 4，we can learn______ ．
A．we should read poems aloud
B．poems are strange
C．poems are difficult to understand
D．I am special
§主旨大意
7..What’s the main idea of Passage 1 ?
A．Poetry is a good bridge to connect the East with the West．
B．Different periods of English poems．
C．Modern poems of English．
D．Differences between Chinese and English poetry．
8.What’s the main idea of Passage 2 ?
A．We should read poems with doors closed．
B．We should first sing songs then read poems．
C．Reading poems can bring people pleasure just like singing a song．
D．We should first read short poems than long ones．
§推理判断
9.From Passage 1，we can infer that______．
A．we’d better read poems in English
B．translated poems can't express intrinsic meaning of original poems
C．there is no advantage 0f reading English poetry in Chinese translation
D．Chinese translation poems are as g00d as English poems
10.From Passage 2，we can infer that______．
A．the writer used to like poetry very much
B．songs and poems are the same
C．the writer fell in love with poems as soon as his e-pal told him something
D. now reading poems is part of the writer’s life
语言点
一．. I，m interested to read some Romantic poetry about love and friendship.我想读一些关于爱情和友谊的浪漫主义诗歌。
(1) interested v.使感兴趣 n.兴趣
interested adj. 感兴趣的，关心的
be interested in 对……感兴趣
be interested to do 想做某事；有兴趣做某事（对所知或所做的事情的感情反应）
of interest 有意思的（=interesting作表语或定语）
with interest 感兴趣的
take/have/feel an interest in 对……感兴趣
针对性训练题：
完成下列句子（利用上面的短语）：
○1他们对艺术界发生的事感兴趣。
They______what is going on in the art world.
○2我不理解为什么他如此地想知道有关你的一切。
I could not make out why he_________know all about you.
○3这一些对我来说一点意思都没有。
All this ____________to me.
○4他饶有兴趣的倾听着。
He listened _________________.
○5没有什么能使他感兴趣。
There，s nothing that can _______him.
（2）romantic 浪漫的，传奇的，不现实的；Romantic（文艺等）浪漫主义的; 浪漫派的；浪漫主义作家（n.）
二.I like reading poems about friendship and I think Romantic poetry will be very nice to read. 我喜欢读关于友谊的诗歌，我认为浪漫主义诗歌读起来很不错。
不定式to read 的逻辑宾语为该从句的主语poetry，注意不可使用不 定式的被动式。类似的还有：
This question is easy to answer.
这个问题很容易回答。
The box is very heavy to carry.
这个箱子搬起来很重。
This room looks very comfortable to live in.
这个房间看上去住起来很舒服。
The water in the river is not fit to drink.
河里的水不适合饮用。
三.belong to 属于；是……的成员（无被动式，无进行时）
Which door does this key belong to?
这把钥匙是哪扇门上的？
I dislike the school to which he belongs.
我不喜欢他所在的那所学校。
As a writer, he really belongs to the 18th century.
作为一个作家，他的确属于18世纪。
He has never belonged to a trade union.
他从未加入过工会。
针对性训练题：
China has been developing rapidly since its foundation, but as is known to us, she is still a country ______ the Third World.
A. belonges to B. belonged to
C. belonging to D. to belong to
四．remind vt. 使想起；提醒
That story reminds me of an experience I once had.
那个故事使我想起了我的一次经历。
That reminds me (that) I must write to him.
那使我想起了我必须要写信给他。
Remind me to take my medicine.请提醒我吃药。
I may forget it unless you remind me of (about) it.
除非你提醒我，否则我可能会忘记的。
May I remind you that the bell will ring soon?
我可以提醒你钟马上就要敲响了吗？
针对性训练题：
What you said just now ______ me of that American professor
A. mentioned B. informed C. reminded D. memorized
五．stand out 显眼：引人注目；显得突出
stand out for 坚持要求/赞成 stand out against 坚决反对
stand out as 是一个杰出的 stand out form 在。。。。中很突出
Robert“s red hair made him stand out in a crowd.
罗伯特的红头发使他在人群中显得十分引人注目。
On this list two names stood out particularly.
在这张名单上，两个名字显得十分引人注目。
He stands out for his rights.他坚持要求他的权利。
针对性训练题：
I’m standing out _____ his idea; I’m standing out ____ my own.
A. for; as B. from; against C. for; against D. against; for
五．light up 点（烟）；照亮；泛起亮光；（使）高兴起来；点 灯 开灯
He lit up before speaking.未曾开口他先点了一支烟。
It，s time to light up.是该点灯的时候了。
A smile lighted / lit up her face.她的脸上洋溢着喜悦的微笑。
针对性训练题：
“Why! It’s you!”Catherine said. Her face ______ .
A. lighted up B. turned up C. took up D. brought up
六 glory (1) n high fame and honour won by great achievements：光荣，荣誉[U]
eg: Our team didn，t exactly cover itself with glory today.
我队今天未能真正载誉而归。
[警示]作为“可夸耀的事，自豪的原因”讲时，为可数名词
eg: One of the glories of the British heritage is the right to a fair trail. 英国人引以自豪的传统之一是有获得公正审判的权利。
[拓展]
○1go to glory 死，上天堂
○2send sb. to glory 送某人归天，杀死某人
○3cover oneself with glory 获得名声及荣誉
(2) v. 因某事而自豪
eg: He glories in his strength. 他为自己的体力而自豪。
We glory in our success. 我们为自己的成功而自豪。
(3) adj. glorious 光荣的，荣誉的，美丽的，灿烂的
adv. Gloriously
针对性训练题： 他们为了国家的荣誉而战。（汉译英）
______________________________________
七．admire v. look at with pleasure or satisfaction; have a high regard for; express admiration of (1)钦佩，羡慕，佩服
eg ；Visitors to Switzerland admire the Alps.
到瑞士的游客都会称赞阿尔卑斯山。
I really admire people who can work in such difficult conditions.
我很佩服在这种困难环境中工作的人。
[警示]表过“佩服某人某方面”时，应和介词for搭配，即admire sb.for sth.
eg : I admired him for his honesty.
我佩服他的诚实。也可说I admired his honesty.
(2) 表示赞美,夸奖
eg: Aren，t you going to admire my new hat
你难道不想夸夸我的新帽子吗？
admirer n. 赞美者，崇拜者，（对女性的）爱慕者
eg: I,m not a great admirer of her work. 我对她的工作不太欣赏。
She has many admirers. 她有许多追求者。
Admiration n.感叹，佩服，称赞
eg: we had great admiration for his courage.
我们非常佩服他的勇气。
[拓展]
○1the admiration of 令人赞赏的对象 eg:
His skill at skiing is the admiration of us.
我们对他的滑雪本领感到佩服。
○2a mutual admiration society 互相吹捧
针对性训练题：
It is for her modesty and honesty that I admire her.( 英译汉 )
____________________________________________________
八.absence n. being away; lack; non-existence (1) 不在，外出，缺席，缺勤（from）
eg :Behave yourself during my absence.
我不在时要规矩点儿。
After an absence of seven years I went home.
外出七年后我返回故乡。
（2） 缺少，缺乏（of）……的 eg :
Absence of rain caused the plants to die.
因缺少雨水导致植物死亡。
[警示]lack也可作“缺乏,不足”讲,该词可以和不定冠词搭配。构成a lack of……
eg: a lack of information 信息缺乏
a lack of water 缺水
而absence 前不能用不定冠词，常和定冠词搭配
eg :the absence of definite proof 缺乏确凿的证据
[拓展]
○1 absence of mind 心不在焉；魂不守舍
○2in the absence of 不在时，外出期间，缺少，不存在
absent adj. not present at （1）不在场的，在别处的
eg :He was absent at roll call. 他点名时不在。
I’ll be absent from home in the afternoon. 我下午不在家。
（2）茫然的
eg :He had an absent look on his face. 他脸上带着茫然若失的神情
另外absent还可以作动词，意为“缺席，不在，不上班”
eg :He absented himself from the meeting. 他没有参加那个会议。
[警示]作为形容词使用时，仅仅表示当事人“不在”，但作为动词使用时除了属于生硬正式的表达以外，还有暗示“故意缺席”的意味。
针对性训练题
他驾车时心不在焉，几乎肇事。（汉译英）
_________________________________________
They spoke ill of the captain in his absence.(英译汉)
_________________________________________________
九．2．play with 相当于及物动词，后面跟宾语，表示“玩弄”或“摆弄”某个东西，是以娱乐或消遣为目的的玩耍。
eg: The boy is playing with his toy train.
这个男孩正在玩他的玩具火车。
It is wrong to play with others.玩弄别人是不对的。
I‘d like to play with my sister. She is very kind.
我愿意和我的姐姐玩耍，她十分和善。
针对性训练题
玩弄一个人的感情是错误的。（汉译英）
_____________________________________
I like ____ the model plane very much. 我非常喜欢这个飞机模型。
十Call up (1) 想起某事，回忆某物
eg :The music calls up old times. 这音乐让人回忆起旧时光。
（2）打电话
eg :He called me up from London.
他从伦敦打电话给我。
[拓展]
○1call at 拜访（某人家或某地）
○2call back 召回，唤回，回某人电话，再打电话来
○3call for 大声呼叫，要求去接某人，去拿某物
○4call in 请（医生等），要求退回，收回
○5call off 取消，拉开
○6call on 访问（人），请求
○7call out 大声叫喊，叫出
针对性训练题
The sound of happy laughter called _____ memories of his childhood.
A. up B. on C. at D. for
十一. come into being 出现；形成，产生
eg: We don’t know when the universe came into being.
我们不知道宇宙是从何时开始存在的。
Later two more armies came into being.
后来又成立了两支部队。
Such a custom came into being long ago .
这种风俗很久以前就有了。
针对性训练题
这样第一个工人联盟就出现了。 （汉译英）
_______________________________________
十二. l ight up 点燃；点亮；照亮；使面有喜色；容光焕发
eg: He lit up a cigarette before he began his speech.
在开始讲话前他先点上一支烟。
Hundreds of candles lighted up the hall. 几百支蜡烛照亮了大厅。
A smile lit up her face. 她一笑表情为之开朗。
Her face lit up with joy. 她因高兴而容光焕发。
针对性训练题
The streetlights _____ ______ ______. 街灯已点亮。 （完成句子）
十三China has a long history during which many of the world‘s greatest poets were active. 中国有悠久的历史，在此期间出现了许多世界伟大的诗人，他们活跃于世界诗坛。
这是一个主从复合句，主句是China has a long history， 从句是由介词during+关系代词which引导的定语从句。
eg ：There was a time during which people lived a hard life.
曾经有一段时期，人们过着艰难的生活。
也可用其他介词which或whom
eg :She is a good student from whom we should learn .
她是我们应该学习的好学生。
This is the house in which he lived last year.
这就是去年他住过的那座房子。
针对性训练题
The village _____ he lived twenty years ago has a history of more than 500 years .
A. in which B. which C. that D. the one
十四That makes poetry difficult to write, but very interesting to read. 那就使诗写起来较难，但读起来却很有意思。
该句式结构为“主语+及物动词+宾语+宾补+to do”。在这个句式中，句
子的宾语正好是不定式是的逻辑宾语，而动词不定式动作的发出者，可能是句子的主语或包括主语，也可能不是或不包括主语，常用动词除make 外，还有find，feel等。
Eg：I found the man hard to get alone with.
我发现很难与那个人相处。
We all felt the plan difficult to carry out.
我们都感到那个计划执行起来很难。
注意下面这个句子：I made the poem written.我让别人写那首诗。
针对性训练题
这位科学家感到在这个领域进行研究非常重要。 （汉译英）
________________________________________________
十五Chinese readers admire his works because of his use of surprising images that reminds them of the works of poets such as Su Dongpo. 中国的读者赞赏他的作品是因为他们使用了使他想起像诗人苏东坡的作品那样令人惊奇的描绘/比喻。
在该句中because of是介词短语作句子的原因状语，在原因状语中，含有一个限制性定语从句修饰images。
（1） works作“著作，作品”讲时是可数名词，且常用其得数形式。 eg :the (complete) works of Shakespeare 莎士比亚全集。
He likes OHenry’s works.他喜欢欧 亨利的作品。
（2）because of 因为……，由于……的缘故，用法与because不同，后面不接从句，而接名词，代词或动名词。
eg: I was late because of the rain,
我迟到是由于下雨的缘故。
I went to bed early because I was tired,
我因为疲倦所以早点睡了。
针对性训练题
___________ his carelessness he didn’t do well in the examination.
A. Because B. Because of C. Since D. As
十六Despite its short history , there is a lot of good English poetry around. 尽管时间短，但确有许多好的英文诗。
句中despite是介词，意为“尽管”。比相同含意的in spite of更正式。在句中作状语，表示让步，后面只能跟名词或相当于名词的词或短语，不能接句子。
eg : Despite his naughty, we all like him.
尽管他淘气，我们还是喜欢他。
a lot of 许多“大量”，同lots of，即可以修饰可数名词，也可以修饰不可数名词，有类似用法的词还有plenty of , a large quantity of (large quantities of ).
eg : Large quantities of water has been polluted in the last few years. 在过去的几年中，大量的水被污染了。
另外，只能修饰可数名词表示“许多、大量”之意的词有many, a good/great many (of) , a (large) number of等。只能修饰不可数名词的有a great deal of , a large amount of , much等。注意，上述词组一般只用于肯定句,否定句和疑问句则用many, much代替。
eg: There are’t many students in the classroom.教室里没有多少学生。
针对性训练题
There are a plenty of books on the book shelves. (单句改错)
______________________________________________
十七Besides, no matter how well a poem is translated, something of the spirit of the original work is lost. 而且，无论首诗翻译得多好，原作中的某些精髓已失。
(1)no matter how well a poem is translated 是一个让步状语从句，no matter how也可用however 替代，但二者后面都必须跟形容词或副词。 eg : However/No matter how hot it is , he will not take off his coat. 无论多热，他也不会脱掉外套。
You cannot catch up with a car , however fast you run.
无论你跑得多快，也赶不上汽车。
(2)lost在句中作形容词意为“丧失的”。
eg: The art of good conversation seems lost.
高雅谈吐的艺术似乎已不复存在。
常用于以下表达：
1，be lost in sth. 专注于某事物。
2．be lost on sb. 对某人不起作用或无影响。
3. be lost to sth. 不再受某事物的影响。
4．make up for lost time 加紧／加快以补偿失 去的时间。
针对性训练题
You must try to finish your project, _____.
A. however are you tired B. however you are tired
C. however tired are you D. however tired you are
十八dare : be brave enough to ; take the risk of (1)可作为动词。
1．敢……，胆敢……
eg; He didn,t dare to speak to her. 他不敢和她说话。
2．敢面对 eg : He will dare any danger. 他敢冒任何危险。
3.(以激将法向人)挑战
eg: He dared me to jump. 他激我跳下去。
（2）作情态动词。 敢……，胆敢……，竟敢……
eg :I dare not climb the mountain, 我不敢爬那山。
How dare you say such a thing ? 你竟敢说出这种话。
针对性训练题
晚上他不敢一个人出去。（汉译英）
_______________________________
十九.send for 派人去叫；遣人去拿；召；请；叫
eg :We must send for a man to repair the TV.
我们必须叫人来修理电视机。
Please keep these things until I send for them.
请替我保管这些东西，等我派人来取。
你最好叫个人代替你参加这次会议。（汉译英） ___________________________________
二十.among , between 两者都有“在……之间”之意
（1）among用于指作为一整体的人或事物之间。
eg :Hand out the books among the class. 把书分发给全班同学。
（2）among常接三个人／物以上的复数名词
eg : The village lies among mountains.这村落位于群山之间。
between用于指两个或两个以上各自独立的人或事之间。
（1） 在（两者）之间
eg :The little girl was sitting between her parents.
这个小女孩坐在她父母亲的中间。
(2)也可用于三个以上，但用以表示个别的相互关系。
eg :Luxembourg lies between France , Germany and Belgium.
卢森堡位于法国、德国和比利时之间。
针对性训练题
There is a big playground ______ the teaching building and the school gate..
A. in B. between C. both D. among
二十一Shade v/n. comparative darkness causes by the cutting of direct rays of light .
n:
(1) 阴暗处，树阴
eg : let’s sit in the shade.我们在阴凉处坐下来吧。
(2) 蔽日物，遮帘，百叶窗（用复数形式shades太阳镜）
eg :Please pull down the window shade.请拉下窗帘。
(3)差别，不同
eg: all shades of opinion 种种意见
a word with several shades of meaning 具有几种不同意义的词。
［警示］a shade 表示“微量，少许”，放在形容词或副词之前，修饰该形容词或副词，或与of连用，修饰不可数名词。
Eg：This book is a shade too difficult for children.
这本书对小孩而言稍微难了一点。
He spoke with a shade of reaerve. 他说话带有些许保留成分。
［拓展］
put sb./sth. in the shade 使某人／某事物相形失色
eg: I thought I was quite a good artist, but your painting puts mine in the shade. 我原以为自己画得不错，可比起你的画来未免相形见绌。
针对性训练题
They would like to stay in the ________in such hot weather.
A. shadow B. sunshine C. shade D. air
二十二Recommend vt speak favourably of ; say that one thinks sth. is good (for a purpose ) or that sb.is fitted (for a post ); suggest 推荐；介绍；劝告；建议
Eg：He strongly recommended her to our firm for the post.
他极力推荐她来我们公司担任这职位。
［拓展］
recommend sb. to do sth. 相当于advise sb. to do sth. “建议某人去做某事，劝某人做某事。“
eg: I recommed you to see her at once. 我劝你马上去看她。
recommend doing sth. 建议做某事
I recommend going by bus.我建议坐公共汽车去。
［警示］recommend后可接that从句，从句中谓语动词用should+v 形式，should可省略。
eg :He recommended that they (should) be set free.他建议释放他们。
针对性训练题
我可以推荐她为一名优秀的秘书。（汉译英）
_______________________________________
The teacher recommended that we _____the novel.
A. read B. would read C. readed D. will read
二十三Contribute ( vt) join with others in giving help , money , etc. give ideas , suggestions , etc. ; write (articles , etc. )and send in 贡献；捐献；投稿
eg: He contributed a lot of money to the charity.
他捐很多钱给慈善机构。
He didn’t contribute anything to world peace. 他对世界和平毫无贡献。
(vi)有贡献；有助于；促成；投稿
Contribute to “为……作贡献；有助于……；向……投稿”
eg: A proper amount of exercise contributes to good health.
适量的运动有益健康。
The construction of a highway will contribute to the growth of the suburbs. 建造高速公路将有助于郊区的发展。
针对性训练题
She ______ a lot of good ideas ______ the discussion.
她在这次讨论中提出很多好的意见。(完成句子)
I make most of my money by _____ book but I _____ contribute.
我的钱大部分是靠写书挣来的，但我也确实给杂志社投过几次稿。
二十四 get through
(1)做完，结束
eg: I get through a lot of work in a day. 我一天做许多工作。
I’m afraid they won’t get through by twelve o’clock.十二点之前他们恐怕做不完。
(2) 通过（考试）
eg: They have all got through the examination.考试他们全通过了。
Did you get through your driving test ? 你驾驶考试通过了吗？
(3)看完，度过，用完
eg: I must get through the book before Saturday.
我必须在星期六之前看完这本书。
(4)（电话）接通
eg :I can’t get through to him . 我给他打电话打不通。
针对性训练题 汉译英
除去物理她都不及格。__________________
我难以想象这段无聊的时间他怎么熬。________________
二十五look up （在字典、时刻表等中）查看；翻查；查找
eg :I looked up (the meaning of )the word in my dictionary.
我在词典中查阅这个词（的意思）。
Look up the directory for his telephone numder.
在电话簿中找他的电话号码。
针对性训练题
汉译英
我常到图书馆查找我所需的资料。____________________
二十六fall into
（1）养成（习惯）
eg: fall into bad habits 养成坏习惯
(2)落入圈套
eg: We played a trick on them and they fell right into it.
我们设了个圈套，他们正好中计了。
(3)开始（谈话等）
eg :I fell into conversation with a writer at the party.
在聚会中我与某位作家谈了起来。
[拓展]
fall behind 落后，拖欠
fall off 掉落，降低，减少
fall in love with 喜爱，迷上
针对性训练题
Children should fall _____ a good habit of studying
A. in B. into C. off D. behind
二十七start with 以……开始
eg :The English alphabet starts with A and ends with Z.
[拓展]
（1）start (all) over ( again ) 再度开始，重新开始，从头做起
(2) start off 出去旅行，出发，动身
(3) start out 出发，动身，启动
(4) start somerhing 惹麻烦，闯祸
(5) to start with 第一，首先
针对性训练题
Starting ______ a humorous story, this class was greatly welcomed among these students.
A. out B. with C. off D. in
二十八. used to , would 二者都有过去常常之意，但用法有所区别
(1)would 只能表示过去的习惯动作，不表示状态，而used to 两者都可以表示
eg :I would sit under the tree and read English every morning .
我以前每天早上总坐在树底下读英语。
He used to be a quiet boy. 他以前是个文静的男孩。
(2)would 不涉及与现在的对比，而used to 则表示过去与现在的对比
eg: We would often get up early and go fishing.
我们以前经常起早去钓鱼。（不表示现在不去钓了）
I used to go to my office on foot .
我过去常常步行上班（暗示现在不这样了）
(3) would 常常有时间状语加以限制，而used to 重在与现在对比，故无此限制
eg: He would often climb a mountain when young年轻时，他常去爬山。
He used to play volleyball. 他过去常打排球。
针对性训练题
I have been living in Beijing for the years. I _____ live in a small village in Hebei province.
A.used to B. use to C. will D. would
二十九 worth , worthy 两词都有“值得……”的意思，但用法不同。
(1) worth 后常跟表价值的词或直接跟名词，而worthy后不跟表价值的词，且后边加上of后才可跟名词。
eg: The old book is worth 300 dollars.这本旧书值300美元。
I don’t think it’s worth the trouble .我觉得它不值得那么费事。
His deed is worthy of praise. 他的行为值得称赞。
(2)worth后可跟动名词，而worthy后需加上of之后，可跟动名词的被动形式。
eg: The book is worth reading. =The book is worthy of being read . 这本书值得读。
(3)worth后不跟不定式，而worthy后常可跟不定式的被动形式。
eg: His deed is worthy to be praised .他的行为值得称赞。
针对性训练题
--This old film is well worth seeing again.
--This old film is well worthy of ___ ______
--This old film is well worthy ____ be _____.
三十I sing when I feel good. 当我高兴时我就唱歌。
(1)feel good 是指精神上舒适的意思。
注意： feel well指身体上舒服。
feel 在此表达中作不及物动词，意为“感觉到……，（心情）觉得……” eg: I feel hungry .我觉得肚子饿。
We felt sorry for her. 我们为她感到难过。
Please feel free to call on us .请不要客气，随时来找我们。
The old man felt cold.那个老人觉得冷。
(2)句中feel作及物动词后跟名词或that从句作宾语，意为“感觉，感到”
eg: She felt a touch on her shoulder . 她感觉有东西触及她的肩膀。
I feel it was written for me . 我感到那是我写的。
针对性训练题
听到这个消息我感到非常兴奋。（汉译英）
三十一That question is not difficult to answer if we change the word poetry to songs . 如果我们把诗词转化为歌曲的话，这个问题就不难解答。
该句式属“主语+系动词+形容词+to do ”句型，to do 是以其主动形式表示被动意思，但该句型中的形容词仅限于表示主语的特征或性质的形容词，如 heavy, light , difficult , hard , easy , hot , cold , good , nice , interesting , important 等
eg: The problem is difficult to solve .这个问题很难解决。
The box is heavy to carry .这个箱子搬起来太重。
Good novels are interesting to read. 好的小说读起来很有意思。
针对性训练题
The maths problem is not easy _____.
A. work out B. to work out C. working out D. workedout
三十二 There are songs that I sing in my head between classes and songs that I want to sing when the school bell rings by the end of the day .有些歌曲是我课间在心里唱的，有些歌曲是在这一天放学铃声响起时我想唱的。
(1)本句是一个主从复合句，主句是There are songs…and songs…第一个songs后跟了一个that 引导的定语从句，that 在句中作宾语。第二个songs后也跟了一个that引导的定语从句，that在句中也作宾语，但在第二个定语从句中又含有一个时间状语从句修饰sing.
(2)In one’s head 在某人心里，head在此短语中意为“头脑，脑（智）力，理性”。类似用法的表达还有：
use one’s head 动脑筋
come into/enter one’s head （想法等）浮现脑海
have a good head on one’s shoulders 头脑好，有才干，精明
keep one’s head 保持冷静
on/upon one’s head 由某人负责。
ut…into one’s head 使……想起某事
Put…out of one’s head 使……忘记某事。
(2) by the end of +表时间的词，作状语，句子常用完成时态
eg :By the end of this week , we have learned 10 units.
到这个星期为止，我们已学习了10个单元。
By the end of last year, they had finished the great project.
到去年年底，他们就完成了那个宏伟的工程。
针对性训练题
到上学期末我们至少掌握了3000个生词。（汉译英）
______________________________________
语法讲解
过去分词作状语，相当于副词，通常表示时间，原因，条件或伴随情况（行为方式）等。
1． 作时间状语 eg :Thrown to the floor, she regained her footing and rushed into the street. 她摔在地板上之后，又站了起来，冲到街道上去了。
2． 作原因状语 eg :Moved by his words, I accepted his present. 被他的话所感动，我接受了他的礼物。
3． 作条件状语 eg :Taken in time, the medicine will be quite effective. 如果吃得及时，这药是很有效的。
4． 作伴随（或方式）状语 eg : He turned away disappointed. 她失望地走开了。
The teacher stood there, surrounded by many students. 老师站在那儿， 周围围着许多学生。
注意：（1）和状语的过去分词通常与句子的主语存在着被动关系，它所表示的动作通常和谓语动词属于同一时间范畴，也可表示先于谓语动词发生的动作。 有时，为了强调先发生的动作，也可用having been.
(2) 动词-ed 形式作状语，有时前面带有连词，是状语从句的省略结构，其中省去了从句主语和be 动词，通常该主语与主句的主语相同。 eg :
When (it is ) heated, water will boil. 水加热就会开。
She won’t go to the party , unless (she is ) invited. 除非得到邀请，否则她不去参加晚会。
针对性训练题
1．________ in the heavy rain, they didn’t get to the railway station on time .
A. Catching B. To catch C. Caught D. Having caught
2._________many times, this story can not interest him again.
A. Tell B Told C. Telling D. To tell
基 础 训 练
汉英翻译
1.回想起；召唤_________________________________
2.属于；是……成员_____________________________
3.出现；产生___________________________________
4.为……作贡献；有助于_________________________
5.突出；引人注意_______________________________
6.照亮；容光焕发_______________________________
7.使某人想起___________________________________
8.通过；完成___________________________________
9.查找；查阅___________________________________
10.以……开始__________________________________
11.借着烛光____________________________________
12.几乎从来不__________________________________
单项填空
1.Plenty of fresh air contributes______ good health．
A．in B．for C．to D．with
2. The road sign is easy to read；the words--well．
A．make out B．stand out
C．work out D．turn out
3. -I was surprised to see wild flowers in Alaska．
-Many people think there is nothing there--ice and snow．
A．rather than B．else than
C．other than D．except than
4. This film_____ the scenes of my childhood．
A．called up B．called on
C．called out D．called for
5. They want to complete the project in half a month．It is _____ impossible，I am afraid．
A．next to B．close to C．up to D．as to
6. Do I have to stop to______ the new words I come across while I am reading a book?
A．1ook at B．1ook for C．1ook up D．1ook into
7. Paris is small in comparison______ London．
A．with B．by C．to D．for
8. The two sides held talks in a friendly______ yesterday afternoon．
A．climate B．atmosphere
C．situation D．environment
9. I don't like those blue socks；What have you got_____ ?
A．though B．yet C．instead D．besides
10.A peculiarly pointed chin is his most memorable facial______.
A．mark B．feature C．sign D．appearance
11.Music often______ us of events in the past．
A．remembers B．reminds
C．reflects D．impresses
12.Sometimes we go on working after dark______ the light of the tractors．
A．at B．with C．in D．by
13.“Who______the expensive new car ______?”She wondered．
A．does；belong to B．is；belonged to
C．is；belonging to D．does；belong
14. He often asked his neighbour to look after his pet during his_______．
A．1ack B．absence C．1eaving D．missing
15.一How shall we go to that airport?
一Well，I recommend______ a taxi．
A．to take B．taking C．to taking D.take
16.In the office I never seem to havetime until after 5:30 p.m,____mang people have got home.
A whose time B.that C.on which D.by which
17.The research is so designed that once ____nothing can be done to change it.
A begins B having begun C beginning Dbegun
18._______is mentioned above,the number of the students in senior schools is increasing.
A.Which B.As C. It D. What
19._______,I have to put it away and focus my attention on study this week.
A.However the story is amusing B.No matter amusing the story is
C.However amusing the story is D.No matter how the story is amusing
20.---Sorry to have interrupted you.Please go on.
------Where was I?
-------You____you didn’t like your father’s job.
A.had said B.said C.were saying D.had been sayin
Ⅰ.短文改错(共10小题;每小题1分,满分10分)
Many years ago a poor man grew an orange tree.1. _______
On the tree there were many fine oranges. Some day he found. 2_______
one of them was so big as a football . He took it 3. _______
for the king . The king was so happy that he gave the 4. _______
poor man lots money. When a rich man heard of it , 5. _______
he said for himself ,“I’ll take my gold cup to the king 6. _______
and he will give me much money . Next day the king received 7. _______
from the cup . The king was very fond of the cup and he told8. _______
the rich man,“I have an orange. It beautiful than the cup,9. _______
soI have decided to give it to you as the reward instead money.1 0.__
测 试 题
第一节：听力
听下面5段对话，每段对话后有一个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳选项，，并标在试卷的相应位置。听完每段对话后，你都有10秒钟的时间来回答有关小题和阅读下一小题。每段对话仅读一遍。
（1）What are they talking about?
A．An actor． B．A film． C．A book．
（2）Where does the conversation probably take place?
A．In a clothing store．
B．At the man's home．
C．In the sitting room．
（3）What made Mary come late?
A．A train accident．
B．A car accident．
C．A heart attack.
(4) Who will carry the case?
A．The man B.The woman C.The taxi driver.
(5) What is the woman doing?
A. Taking an exam.
B. Going over his lessons.
C. Joining somebody else.
§5．2第二节
听下面5段对话或独白。每段对话或独自后有几个小题，从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项．中选出最佳选项，并标在试卷的相应位置。听每段对话或独白前，你将有时间阅读各个小题，每小题5秒钟。听完后，每小题将给出5秒钟的作答时间。每段对话或独白读两遍。
听第6段对话，回答第6～8题。
（6）How does Simon find the college?
A．He likes its position and its size，but he thinks it'svery big．
B．He likes its position and its size，but he thinks it's very small．
C．He doesn't like its position or its size，but he thinks it's very big．
（7）What do the students at college do in their free time?
A． All kinds of things can be done except going to the library to study．
B．Nothing can be done but going to the library to study．
C．Everything can be done，including going to the library
to study．
(8)How many students are there in the college Simon is visiting?
A．1 000． B．10 000． C．100．
听第7段对话，回答第9～11题。
(9)What d0 we know about the list?
A．It got lost．
B．It's thrown away．
C．It has been taken by the woman．
(10)Why does the man need the books?
A．To sell them．
B．To read them．
C．To lend them to the woman．
(11)What does the woman think of the books?
A．They are useless．
B. They are good for her.
C. They are needed badly.
听第8段对话，回答第12～14题。
12.Where does this conversation probably take place?
A．In a restaurant． B．In a hotel． C．In a hospital．
13.How much is a single at the back?
A．10 dollars． B．20 do11ars． C．50 dollars．
14．How much should the man pay for his booked rooms?
A．100 dollars． B．150 do11ars． C．120 dollars．
听第9段对话，回答第15～17题。 ．
15.What are the two people talking about?
A．Daily life．
B．A steel plant．
C．How to collect rubbish．
16.Where is the plant being built?
A．Far away from the town．
B．Not far away from the town．
C．In the centre of the town．
17.The plant is built to_____ ．
A．produce rubbish
B．deal with waste paper
C．deal with rubbish
听第10段独白，回答第18～20题。
18.What's the passage mainly about?
A．The duties of the 1ibrarian．
B．The rules of the library．
C．The length of the students’ borrowing books．
19.How many books can students borrow at a time?
A．2 books． B．3 books． C．4 books．
20.Which of following is NOT true of the rules for good behavior in the 1ibrary?
A．The students should keep the books in good condition
when they return them．
B．The students should keep the books longer than two
weeks if they don't finish them．
C．The students want to take away some books with the
permission given by the librarian．
§ 单项填空
(1)The set of stamps，once______，will be very popular
with stamp-collectors．
A．to be printed B．printing
C．to print D．printed
(2)______ all his friends agree, he was unusually warm-hearted，loving and generous．
A．What B．That C．When D．As
(3) 一That man looks very familiar.
-He does to me，too．He reminds______ Dr．Richards．
A．me to B．me C．me for D．me of
(4) Do what you think is right--they say.
A．however B．whichever C．whatever D．wherever
(5) The two sistets look so much alike．I can hardly tell them_____
A．away B．apart C．along D．separate
(6) I feel______ when I sing my favourite songs in English.
A．good B．well C．healthy D．down
(7) My father recommended that I______ my officer.
A．didn't disobey B．not to disobey ’
C．not disobey D．mustn’t disobey
(8)______ troublesome the problem is，he faces it with
patience.
A．No matter how B．No matter what
C．Despite D．Although
(9) The goals--he had fought au his hfe no longer seemed important to him． ．
A．after which B．for which
C．with which D．at which
(10)______ not to watch TV，the boy got angry．
A．To tell B．To be told C．Telling D．Told
(11) If he works hard at his lessons，I guess he can______the final exams.
A．get through B．go through
C．1ook through D．run through
(12)_______ poetry in English also opens the door to--
new ways of expressing yourself in Chinese．
A．Read；find B．Reading；find
C．Reading；finding D．Read；finding
(13) Eating too much fat can--heart disease and cause high blood pressure．
A．relate to B．contribute to
C．attend to D．devote to
(14) Reading______ the lines,1 would say that the Government are more worried than they will admit．
A．beyond B．along C．between D．among
(15)______ in the Unit States,St．Louis has now become the 24th largest city．
A．Being the fourth biggest city
B．0nce the fourth biggest city
C．It was once the fourth biggest city
D．The fourth biggest city it was
§完形填空
One evening，long after most people had gone to bed,a friend of mine and I 1 happi1y home through the 2 street．We had been to a musical and 3 about the people we had seen and heard in it.
“The show 4 him a star overnight，”said my friend about one of them．“He was completely 5 before．And now thousands of people 6 him gifts and letters．”“I thought him quite good，”I said，“but not 7 thousands of letters.As a matter of 8 ，one of his songs gave me a shock．It was too noisy．”“What was that?”my friend asked me，“ 9 it to me．”I began to sing．“Do be quiet．You will give everybody a shock and 10 them up for mi1es 11 ,Besides，there will be a poIiceman 12 us．”My friend gave me an astonished look.
“Never mind．I don't care．What is the matter?”I said and went on singing 13 the top of my voice．
Presently there came a policeman, 14 in front of me,his notebook 15 ．“ 16 ，sir，”he said，“You have a very good voice，if I 17 say so．Who taught you singing? I’d very much 18 to find someone who can give my daughter singing lessons．Would you be 19 to tell me your name and address? Then my wife and I would 20 on you and we could discuss it.”
1. A．went B．was corning
C．was making our way D．had lost our way
2. A．calm B．crowded C．silent D．quiet
3. A．were thinking B．were talking
C．knew D．were discussing
4. A．called B．turned C．named D．made
5. A．famous B．forgotten C．stranger D．unknown
6. A．show B．write C．send D．brought
7. A．worthy B．worth C．received D．accepted
8. A．fact B．facts C．a fact D．the fact
9． A．Read B．Sing C．Say D．Tell
10. A．can B．pick C．wake D.join
11. A．1ong B．far C．around D．away
12. A．observing B．after C．besides D．in front of
13. A．with B．on C．in D．at
14. A．stood B．going C．standing D．walking
15. A．closing B．closed C．open D．0pened
16. A．Wait a minute B．stop singing
C．I’m sorry D．Excuse me
17. A．may B．can C．must D．don't
18. A．liked B．wanted C．1ike D．eager
19. A．brave B．kind enough
C．willing D．honest
20. A．try B．visit C．invite D．drop in
§阅读理解
A
To me, life without music would not be exciting. I realize that this is not true for everybody．Many people get along quite well without going to the concert，or listening to the record．But music plays an important part in everyone's life，whether he realizes it or not．Try to imagine，for example,what fi1ms or TV plays would be like without music．Would the feelings，the moving plot(情节)，and the greatest interests，be as exciting or dramatic(戏剧性)?I’m not sure about it.
Now，we have been speaking of music in its more common meaning--the kind of music we hear in the concert hall．But if we look at some parts of music more closely，we discove them in our everyday life too--in the rhythm(旋律)of the sea,the melody of a bird in the woods and so on．So music surely has meaning for everyone，in some way or other．And,of course,it has special meaning for those who have spent all their lives working on playing or writing music．
It is well said，“Through music a child enters a world of beauty,expresses himself from his heart，feels the joy of doing things alone，learns to take care of others，develops his mind and makes his body strong．”
1.What does the writer say more about in the passage?
A．Life full of music． B．Life without music．
C．Importance of music． D．Development of music．
2.From the text，we know that many people______．
A．don't realize the importance of music
B．get along quite well without music
C．go to the concert instead of enjoying films
D．think music would be less exciting than fnms
3.In the writer's opinion，if there was no music in films or TV plays,______．
A．the cinema and theatre would be quiet
B．we would lose some of the audience
C．everything would be as exciting as before
D．it would be hard to imagine the result
4.What does the underlined word“melody”mean in the text?
A．Flying． B．Looking． C．Singing． D．Living．
B
Alice Walker makes her living by writing．And her poems,short stories，and novels have won many prizes for her．She was born in Eatonton，Georgia．She went to public schools there,and then to Spelman college in Atlanta before coming to New York to attend Sarah Lawrence college，from which she graduated in 1966．For a time she lived in Jackson，Mississippi，with her lawyer husband and small daughter．About Langton Hughes，Ametican Poet，her first book for children,she says，“After my first meeting with Langston Hughes，I promised 1 would write a book for chndren someday．Why? Because I，at twenty-two，knew next to nothing of his work，and he didn’t scold me；he just gave me a pile of his books．And he was kind to me；1 will always be thankful that in his warmth he fulfi1led my deepest dream(and need)of what a poet should be．”
“To me he is not dead at a11．Hardly a day goes by that I don't think of him or speak of him．0nce，just before he died，when he was sick with the flu，I took him a basket full of angry,The joy I felt in giving that simple gift is undiminished(没有减弱)by time．He said he liked oranges，too．”
1．What is the main topic of the passage?
A．Langston Hughes’books about Alice Walker．
B．The childhood of Alice Walker and Langston Hughes．
C．Langston Hughes，American poet．
D．Alice Walker’s reflection(印象，评论)on Langston Hughes.
2. In the passage，Alice Walker is _______
A．a researcher at Sarah Lawrence College
B．a professor at Sarah Lawrence College
C．a prize-winning writer
D．a writer of plays for children
3. Before attending college，Alice Walker went to school in _______.
A．Atlanta，Georgia B．Eatonton，Georgia
C．Jackson，Mississippi D．Lawrence Massachusetts
4. From the passage we can conclude that AIice Walker was twenty-two years old when______．
A．she moved to Jackson，Mississippi
B．she moved to New York
C．she first met with Langston Hughes
D．Langston Hughes died
5. What did Alice Walker mean when she says Langston Hughes“is not dead at all”?
A．Langston Hughes believed in eternal life(永生)．
B．She hadn’t been told of Langston Hughes’death．
C．For her，Langston Hughes had never really existed．
D．Langston Hughes is still present in her thoughts．
6.According to the passege，what did AIice Walker give Langston Hughes before he died．
A．A job． B．A prize．
C．Some oranges． D．Pile of books．
C
As you explore(探索)music，you will find much that is familar to you．You will find music which tells of interesting places and exciting things to do．You will find music which expresses feelings that are often your own．
Music is an expression of the people．As you explore，you will find music of people at work，and in worship(做礼拜)．You will find music expresses love of country，1ove of nature,and love of home.Music is also an expression of the composer(作曲家)．
As an artist the composer expresses his own musical ideas．He studies the materials of music and discovers ways of using them．He 1ooks for new kinds of musical expression．
Music can suggest activities(活动)and feelings，whicn we all share．We can enjoy playing and singing music，dancing and listening to the music of the people and the artists of different times and places．
1.The title of this passage is______.
A．Let’s Enjoy Singing and Dancing
B．Let’s Explore Music
C．Music--An Expression of ComposerS
D．Music--A suggestive Feeling
2.In the first paragraph，the author appeals(呼吁)to us，saying _______.
A．“Try to write music．”
B．“Be friendly to music.”
C．“Express your feeling in music．”
D．“Discover the things and places in music．’’
3.From the second paragraph，we know that______.
A．music is mainly of country，nature and home
B．if we love music，we will 1ove the country，nature and home
C．you may listen to music at work or at play
D．music can express how people live，work，and think
4.By means of music，the composer wishes that______.
A．you would study with him
B．you would share his feelings and ideas
C．you would express your own feelings
D．you would help discover ways of using music and new
kinds of musical expression
5.The last paragraph observes that music makes it possible_____.
A．to express activities and feelings at the same time
B．to bring understanding between people of different Times and places
C．that people can enjoy playing and singing music，dancing and listening to music at the same time
D．that people of different times and places can get together
D
Music comes in many forms；most countries have a style of their own．Poland has its folks．Hungary has its czardas．Agentina is famous for the tango．The U．S．is known for jazz，the type of music that has gained worldwide popularity．
Jazz is American contribution to popular music．While classical music follows formal European tradition(传统)，jazz is rather a free form．It is full of energy，expressing the moods.interests，and emotions(感情)of the people．It is breaking and exciting with a modern sound．In the 1920’s jazz sounded like America．And so it does today．
The origins(起源)of the music are as interesting as the music itself．Jazz was invented by Ametican Negroes，or blacks，as they are called today，who were brought to the Southern states as slaves．They were sold to farm owners and forced to work long hours in the cotton and tobacco fields．This work was hard and life was short．When a Negro died his friends and relatives would gather and carry the body to have a ceremory before they buried him．
There was always a band with them．0n the way to the ceremony the band played slow，solemn music suitable for the situation．But on the way home the mood changed．Spirits lifted．Everyone was happy．Death had removed one of their number，but the living were glad to be alive．The band played happy music．This music made everyone want to dance．It was an early form of jazz.
Music has always been important in Negro life．The blacks，who were brought to America from West Africa，had a rich musical tradition．In the fields，they made up work songs．Singing made the hard hard work go faster．And when they got to Christianity,they made lovely spirituals，which have become an everlasting part of American music．
1.From the passage，we can see that jazz______．
A．is a kind of African music
B．started from Africa but is popular in America
C．was started by blacks working in Africa
D．was started bv blacks in America
2.Jazz is a kind of music______．
A．almost the same as classical music
B．quite different from classical music
C．popular only in America
D．quite different from Africa music
3.Generally speaking，Jazz is mostly a kind of______．
A．American music
B．African music
C．classical music
D．popular music played at funerals
4.Usually we may feel______ moods when we listen to
jazz music．
A．sad and sorry B．tiring and hard working
C．exciting and happy D．lonely and sad
5.Jazz will always be connected with______．
A．American blacks
B．slavery in the United States
C．modern times
D．quick development of music
E
Mi1lions of years ago dinosaurs(恐龙) lived on the earth．
In the days of dinosaurs the whole earth was warm and wet．There were green forests and they could find enough to eat．Later，parts of the earth became cold and dry，and the forests there died．Then dinosaur could not find enough to eat．This must be one reason why dinosaurs died out．
We can guess another reason．New kinds of animals came on the earth．Some had big brains and were fast and strong．They could kill dinosaurs．
There may be other reasons that we don't know about yet．Scientists are trying to make more discoveries about dinosaurs．
Dinosaurs were of many sizes and shapes(形状)．Some were as small as chickens，while some were about 90 feet long．
There were also terrible fights between dinosaurs．They might have happened more than 100 mi1lion years ago．Though there was no man to see any of the fights，we can be told by the animal’s footprints(足迹)that fight did take place．
1.According to the passage，diilosaurs did exist(存在) only _______ on the earth．
A．for millions of years
B．millions of years ago ’
C．more than 100 million years ago
D．when it was warm and wet somewhere
2.One reason why dirlosaurs died out is that______．
A．there were too many dinosaurs
B．parts of the earth became cold and dry
C．the dead forests there could not supply them with enough food
D．they couldn't find enough to eat
3.0ne more reason may be that______．
A．new kinds of animals came on the earth
B．some fast and strong animals with big brains could kill them
C．some dinosaurs were as small as chickens
D．some big dinosaurs died in the fights
4.We can see from this passage_______.
A．scientists are trying to make some dinosaurs
B．dinosaurs are dangerous enough
C．dinosaurs are worth studying
D．scientists know nothing about dinosaurs
5.That terrible fights can be explained by______．
A．footprints of the animals
B．imagination(想象)
C．rocks and forests
D．dinosaurs eggs
短文改错
A man with two badly burning ears went to 1. ______
see his doctor．“What has happened with you?” 2．______
asked the doctor．“Well，my wife was ironing(熨衣服)3,______
whi1e I am watching a ball game on TV．She 4．______
put the hot iron near the telephone where my 5．______
phone rang．I picked up the iron instead the phone．”6 ______ The doctor nodded．“And what has happened to other 7_______
ear?”The man said，“I have just hung up 8. _____
when a same man called again．”The 9. _____
doctor couldn't help laugh when he heard this . 10.______
答 案
语篇领悟
1.C 2.B 3.D 4.D 5.D 6.A 7.A 8.C 9.B 10.D
基础训练
汉英翻译
1.call up 2.belong to 3.come into being 4.contribute to 5.stand out 6.light up 7.remind sb of 8.get through
9.look up 10.start with 11.by the light of a candle
12.next to never
单选
1.C 2.B 3.C 4.A 5.A 6.C 7.A 8.B 9.D 10.B
11.B 12.D 13.A 14.B 15.B 16.D 17.D 18.B 19.C 20.C
改错
1. √ 2. Some → one 3. so→as 4. for→to
5. lots→lots of 6. for→to 7. Next→The next 8.from
9. beautiful→more beautiful 10. instead→instead of
篇5：NSEFC 高二英语教案学案一体化 unit 2
Unit 2 News Media
(Teaching aims and demands)
类别 课程标准要求掌握的项目
话题 Talking about news and the media
词汇 media reliable fire face difficulty editor reason elect injure headline inform informedrelate talent talented switch interviewer present reflect effort spiritual seldom AIDS addictsocial attention tolerate affair concern telegram retire complete bore attitude disappointguard citizen polluter arm update
go up burn down relate sb／sth relate to for once be addicted to even if draw attention toon all sides change one's mind current affairs look up to fall in love with
功能 1．谈论新闻媒体(Talking about news and the media)Our readers want to know about…Which of the media is the most reliable?Newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens．2．表达意见(Expressing opinions)The man was careful|funny|nosy|generous|honest|clever…What do you think of…? 1 would rather choose…What's your opinion? I don't think we should choose…Why do you choose…? I don't think we should choose…Perhaps…is more important．
语法 过去分词短语作定语和表语1．能够用．ed形式描述人或物品的特性或状态；a journalist He is experienced一 ‘an experienced joumalist ，a programme It is updated一 。an updated programme1 want to write about people addicted幻drugs．2．能够用一ed形式与系动词连用，描述人或物品的特性或状态；The American audience is excited about Yao Ming ‘s performance .．
阅读本单元课文，完成下列各题：
§1．1细枝末节
(Passage 1)
●1 what's the basic task for a reporter?
A．To report events as what happened．
B．T0 reflect opinions according to readers’tastes．
C．To develop stories as the editors tell him or her．
D．To draw readers’attention．
●2 The first sentence in the first paragraph mean
A．more information was given to us by news
other media than that simply recorded
B．it takes newspapers and other media more efforts and time to report what happens than just record what happens
C．what newspapers and 0ther media can give us is much
more than what is simply recorded
D．recording what hapPens is much easier than．using
newspapers and other media
●3 According to the passage， the media mentioned are
A．newspapers B．TV programme C．Broadcasts
D．Both A and B
(Passage 2)
●4 what happened in the first report?
A．Some workers in the company are on strike． 。
B．A group of about 100 people made trouble for the
workers in the company．
C．Not all of the trouble--makers left peacefullv after the
police arrived．
D．Workers fought with the trouble-makers．
●5 In the 2 nd report what happened?
A．A peaceful march against pollution was put to an end
by the company．
B．The company was in trouble because of the citizens．
C．The citizens fighting against the poUution fought a-
gainst the angry men with sticks．
D．0n seeing the men with sticks sent by the company，
the citizens were timid and frightened．
●6 The company in the first report is considered__ ______
while in the second it is regarded as
A．the best；the worst B．a best；the worst
C．the richest；the poorest D．richest：poorest
§1．2主旨大意
●7 what topic is treated in Passage 1 7 A．How is the news made and written?
B．How does a reporter decide what to write?
C．How do newspapers help us understand the worl‘
D．Their jobs and how the news we read is made written．
●8 what’s the best title for each story in Passage 2 7
A．The most successful company／The worst compan
B．A Fight with the police／A Fight with citizens．
C．Friends or enemies?／Bad or g00d citizens?
D．Making troubles／Carrying out the right of the
citizens．
§1．3推理判断
9 “Behind the headlines'’
A．we can understand proves thatthe world better by reading headlines
B．the headlines must be written by talented journalis
C．publishing papers needs much and is worth doing
D．the headlines must be true
10. From two reports in Passage 2，we can infer
A．the most successful company in the first report is
ally the worst poIluter in the second one
B．the citizens against the pollution in the second report are the trouble-makers in the first report
C．police in the first report are the angry men armed with sticks to fight with the citizens in the second repcrt
D．all of the above
(answers :1.A 2.B 3. D 4. B 5. A 6. A 7. D 8. B 9.C 10.D
Listening text:
Part 1:
R: reporter K: Mr Keller
R: Good morning, Mr Keller .My name is Harry Hunter and I work for the Daily Tumes .I would like to ask you a few questions about Jim Gray.
K: Good morning, Mr Hunter . What would you like to know about Mr Gray?
R: Well,I want to know if it is true that Mr Gray no longer works for your company .
K: Yes ,that’s true .Mr Gray was fired today .He has been having problems lately and it was time for him to leave .
R: I see .What kind of problems?
K: Mr Gray was too slow and it took him too long to do his job .He talked too much and was moisy and sometimes even wild .He was not serious enough .Instead of thinking about work ,he would spend too much time disturbing the other workers with questions and comments.
R: So the other workers didn’t like Mr Gray?
K: Mr Gray was very nosy, always trying to find out what other people were doing .Many people were also unhappy with Mr Gray because he was rude and said bad things about people.
R: I see .Were there any other reasons why uou fired him?
K: Yes, Mr Gray was also careless with his money .Now if you will excuse me,I have to get back to work .
R: Thank you for answering my questions.
Part 2
P: Paul W: Wendy
P: Hi, Wendy .Did you hear that Jim was fired today ?
W: Yes, I did. Isn’t it awfull I have worked with him for ten years and he is one of my best friends .I can’t believe that he was fired .
P: I don’t understand it, either. Jim faced many difficulties but wouldn’t give up .He was careful and always took the time to do a job well .
W: Even when he was very busy, Jim always found time to speak to others .He was funny and happy and liked to make others laugh .He always had a kind word for me.
P: Yes, he was always interested in other people and cared about their their life and problems .When my wife was ill ,he always asked me about her and tried to cheer me up.
W: Jim was always so generous .He was happy to spend money on good meals and gifts.
P: Yes, he was .And he was also very honest and always told people what he thought about something.
W: I suppose we won’t see him very often in the future .I’ll miss him.
P: I’ll miss him, too.
Listening text
The chief editor of a daily newspaper is having a meeting with the journalists. She is telling them what she wants them to do today.
Good morning, everybody .Listen carefully .This is what I want you to do.
Mick, Jane Sxott, the sportsman is arriving at the airport this morning .Her plane arrives at 11 .Will you be there please ?I want you to get a good photograph of her .See if you can talk to her .Ask her what her future plans are ,ok ?
Bob, the medical conference opens today at the Capital Hotel .It starets at 9 o’clock, so you ‘ll have to hurry .I want you to listen to the opening talk and make some notes .Get a photegraph too of the persom gibing the talk .
Susan ,I want you to interview someone at the Home Office .These new traffic plans are very interesting .I want you to set up an interview today .I want you to put your report in tomorrow’s paper. Get as much information as you can .Try to collect some plants or diagrams .They woll be very useful.
Language points
1. reliable可靠的；靠得住
rely on／upon依靠；指望
Is this information reliable?这条信息可靠吗?
He 1ooks a nice．reliable mall．
他看上去是个仁慈可靠的人。
I rely on you to help me．我指望你帮我。
we can't rely on him／his coming on time．
别指望他按时来。
Nowadays we rely increasingly on computers for work
现令人们越来越依赖计算机协助工作。
◇[考题1] Peter is my close friend，who can be______what he promises．
A．rlelied on to do
B．relied to do
C．relied on doing
D．relying to doing
[解析] 解本题的关键在判断出rely的语态及含(to)do的语法功能。从句意可知，he与rely on之间存在动宾关系，所以rely on应用被动式。后半句是表示目的的状语，to是不定式的符号。另外，B、D两项中on不可少。[答案]A
2．go up涨价；上涨；上升；升级；增长；(楼房等)盖起来。修建起来
Everything went up except salaries．
除了薪水以外，其他一切都上涨了。
Have you seen the paper today?Up go the prices again!你看了今天的报纸吗?又涨价了!
The temperature is going up．温度正在上升。
New office buildings are going up everywhere．
到处都在建新的办公大楼。 ．
◇[考题2] Although the prices of TV set are______，he managed to make the manager_____the price of that TV set．
A．going up；bring down B．gone up；go down
C．going up；brought down D．going down；bring up
[解析] 从语境看，前一空表示“上涨”，后一空表示“使……降价”才合题意，而不是相反。go up是个不及物动词，bring down是及物动词。[答案]A
3.inform vt.通知；告诉（后接名词，代词，of 引起的复合宾语、不定式及从句等）
He will inform where to go .
他将通知我们去哪儿。
He informed them of his arrival .
他告诉他们他到了.
He informed the police that some money was missing.
他向警方报案说有些钱不见了。
He is a well-informed man .
他是个消息灵通人士。
注意 : inform后不可直接用双宾语。类似用法有：
warn sb.of sth
rob sb．of sth抢劫某人某物
remind sb．of sth.提醒某人某事
cure sb．of sth．治疗好某人某病
◇[考题3] (1) The manager promised to keep me_____of how our
business was going on．
A．to be informed B．on informing
c．informed D．informing (湖北黄冈市交流题)
【解析】 inform如果用主动形式，则用法为inform sb．of sth但本题中“我”与inform之问存在动宾关系，“我”才是被通知的对象，所以inform要使用被动式。从句法功能可知，此处作宾语补足 语，即keep sb．／sth．done。[答案] c
(2)一Keep me informed--tlle latest news．
---OK．
A．by B．at C．for D．of
[解析] informed表示“被通知的”，此处作宾语补足语，是被动形式，因此本题涉及的主动形式为inform sb．of sth．，这是一个固定 搭配。[答案] D
4. reIate n把……联系起来 l
be related to与……有联系；与……有关
relation n．(=relative)关系；亲戚
I can't relate those two ideas．
我联系不起来那两个观点。
I can't relate what he does to what he says．
我不能把他所做的与他所说的联系起来。
two related questions两个相关的问题
All tllings were related to all other things．
一切之事与其他之事均互相关联。
[考题4] Can you _____what happened in your childhood to your present state of mind ?
A. connect B.keep in touch with
C.relate D.join to
[解析]四个词组含义有相同之处,但更多的是含义及用法上的各不相同.connect 表示”联系”,后多用with;keep in touch with 表示”与……联系”,指的是交流沟通方面的;join to 表示”连接”,且to 为多余.句意表示”把……相联系起来”
5． present adj．出席的；在场的；存在的；现在的
n．目前；现在；礼物
V.赠与；呈递；提出(论点)
He was the only Engishman present．
他是在场的惟一的英国人。
Here's the doctor's present address．
这里是医生现在的地址。
Oxygen is present in the air．空气中存在着氧气。
At present we are living in Paris．
目前我们住在巴黎。
He often gave her little presents．
他常常给她小礼物。
He presented the fund with a cheque／presented a
cheque to the fund．他把一张支票交给基金会。
She presented her case to the meeting．
她提出了自己的理由供会议讨论。
◇[考题5] (1)All the people_______at the party were his supporters．(北京高考题)
A．present 、B．thankful
C．interested D．important
[解析] 四个形容词的含义各不相同：“出席的、感激的、感兴趣的、重要的”。从句意看，应该表示：“出席的人都是他的支持者”。由此可以确定答案。这一类题不是考查同义词辨析，而是测试利用语境选词的能力，一般来讲，此类题不太难。[答案]A
(2)Let’s leave things as they are_______，even though we may have a change later on．
A．present B．presently
C．at present D．for the present
[解析] at present表示“现在；目前”；presently表示“不久；过了一会儿”，另外一种用法是相当于at present。但本题的语境表示“就在来说，暂时”，用for the present表示。[答案]D
6. disappoint／bore比使人失望／厌倦
disappointing /boring vt.只使人失望的／厌倦的
disappointed／bored adj．失望的／厌倦的
He was bored．The meeting was boring.
他很烦，那个会议也让人生厌。
The film disappointed／bored him． 影片使他失望／厌倦。
From the disappointed 1ook，I knew he failed the test again．
◇[考题6] The 1ong speech giyen by the old professor seemed
_____and endless．He felt so_____that he nearly fell asleep.
A．disappointed；boring
B．disappointed：bored
C．disappointing；bored
D．disappointing；boring
[解析]第一句的主语是speech，所以应用disappointing(使人失望的)修饰；第二句的主语是he，所以应用bored(厌倦的)修饰。又如
It’s a disappointing book．这是一本令人失望的书。[答案] C
7. fall in love爱上(强调动作)
be in Iove with与……相恋；爱上(强调状态)
He fell in 1ove with its warm weather．its clear brooks and thick forest．他爱上了这里温暖的气候，清清的溪流和茂密的森林。
They have been in love with each other for 2 years.
他们已经相爱两年了。
◇[考题7] They_______in love at first sight．Now，they____in
1ove with each other for nearly a month .
A．were；fell B．fell；were C．were；were D．fell；fell
[解析] at first sight表示“见第一眼”，强调动作；for nearly amonth是表示一段时间的状语，不与短暂动作(如fall in love)连用，要与完成时连用。[答案]B
8．face此面对；面向 诚向朝；面临(困难等)。正视对付(危险、困难等)
The building faces tlle park．
那座建筑物面对着公园。
Left(Right)face．向左(右)转。
I was faced with a new problem．
我面临一个新问题。
We must face out trouble and boar it_
我们必须正视我们的困难，并勇于承受。
That’s a flat facing the south.
那是一座朝南的公寓。
◇[考题8](1)_______such a difficult problem，he didn’t know what to do． ．
A．Faced B．Facing C．Faced to D．Facing witll
[解析】face意为“面对”，用作及物动词，若用选项A则需加介词with。[答案]B
(2)My mum dropped me off at elementary school，leaving me alone to_______new challenges．
A．offer B．avoid C．dea1 with D．face with
[解析]offer提供，avoid逃避，依题意可排除；face=be face with除。deal with“处理，对付”，符合题意。[答案] C
9．reason理由；推论；推断；说服，想出(解决问题的方法)
He reasoned that if we started at down．we would
be there by noon．
他推断，我们要是黎明出发，中午就能到。
She was reasoned into a sensible courage of action．
她被说服而采取了理智的做法。
Tne detective tried to reason out how the thief had
escaped．
这个侦探反复琢磨想弄明白那个窃贼是怎样逃跑的。
Have you tried reasoning with him?
你尝试跟他讲礼了吗?
Philosophers are good at reasoning．
哲学家们都很善于推理。
◇[考题9] (1)He would give no_______for his behaviour．
A．reason B．aim C．cause D.target
[解析]句意：他没有理由解释他的行为。本句中能与for搭配使用的有reason、cause、target，但cause表示客观原因；target目标；只有reason表示“理由”；aim后应与at搭配，而不是for。另外，reason做动词用时，表示“推论，推理”。[答案]A ，
(2)Be_______；you can't expect her to do all the work on her own．
A．1ogical B．honest C．reasonable D．sincere
[解析] 句意为“讲点理吧，你不能指望她一个人单独做所有这些事。”1ogical符合逻辑的，有逻辑头脑的；honest“诚实的”和sincere“真诚的”明显不合逻辑。【答案】c
10．burn down烧毁；(由于燃料烧尽而)火力减弱
The wood-shed burnt down in half an hour．
半个小时小木屋就烧毁了。
The fire is burning down，get some more coal please．火力在减弱请再拿些煤来。
Ihe room grew colder as the fire burnt down．
那间房子里变得越来越冷随着火势减弱
◇[考题10] Tne shopping center in the city_______at a result of a cigarette．which shocked the whole country． 、
A．burned down B．turned down
C．turned up D．taken in
[解析] A项表示“烧毁”，B项表示“把(声音)调小”，c项表示“把(声音)调大些”，D项表示“吸入、欺骗等”。根据题意“那个城市的购物中心被烧毁了”可以选出答案。[答案]A
11．Switch n.开关。电门转换器；转变。改变。交换位置
a light switch灯的开关
Could you switch the TV over?
请你改换电视频道好吗?
Our glasses have been catched-this is mine．
我们的杯子弄反了--这个才是我的。
含switch的词组如下：
switch(Sth.)off切断(电源煤气等)
switch(sb．)off(使某人)感到乏味，厌烦等
switch on打开，接通
◇[考题11] Would you please_____the light? I can't see much
clearly．It is getting dark．
A．switch off B．switch on
C．turn off D．take on
[解析]从下文中的“我看得不是很清楚”以及“天在变黑”，可知“我要求你打开灯光”。“打开”有两种表达：switeh on或turn on。“关上(C、D两项)”显然有悖语境。[答案] B
12．Reflect vt.反映(某事物的性质)；表现；反射；映出；反省。考虑
Her sad 1ooks reflected the nature of her thoughts.
她面带忧伤显出心事重重。
The letter reflects her sorrow．那封信表现出她的痛苦。
Mirrors reflect light．镜子反射光。
Trees reflected in a 1ake．湖中映出的树影。
Please reflect on the matter．请仔细考虑那件事。
I reflect on possible reasons for my fai1ure．
我反省导致我失败的种种原因。
◇[考题12] (1)Her happy look_____that she has done well in the exam.
A．presents B．reflects C．appears D．seems
[解析] A项表示“出席”，C项表示“出现”，D项表示“似乎”。依句意应选“表现出”。[答案] B
(2)Though Van Gosh formed his own painting style，we can still see the______of some famous Freneh artists on his works．
A．reflect B．application C．relation D．influence
【解析]B项表示“申请、运用等”，C项表示“关系”，D项表示“影响”，只D项符合题意“他人对凡高有影响”。[答案】D
13．addict使沉溺。使入迷：使醉心
be addicted to沉迷于……
Don't addict yourself to such fcolish things．
不要沉溺于这些愚蠢的事情。
Many students are addicted to playing computer games．
很多学 生沉迷于玩电脑游戏。
◇ [考题13] Some students，who are addicted--the legend
Games，do not go to school at all．
A．to play B．to p1aying C．playing D．be playing
[解析]be addicted协为固定搭配“to’’为介词，后接动词ing形 式[答案]B
14．ignore此忽视。不顾……，对(某Ⅳ事)不理睬，某事装作不知道
He ignored my advice．他忽视(不顾)我的忠告。
I can’t ignore his rudeness any 1onger．
他的粗暴无礼我再也不能不闻不问了
◇[考题14] Some of the members demanded to know why they had
been kept_____the true facts until they reached the present critical stage．
A．in ignorance of B．in the light of
C．in honour of D．in view of
[解析] 句意为“一些成员要求知道为什么直到目前的关键时期他们才被告之真相。”此四个介词短语意思不同。in ignorance of(对……) 不知道(或不了解);in honour of 对。。。。。。表示敬意 ；in view of 鉴于
I said hello to her，but she ignored me completely．
我向她打招呼，可她根本不理我。
15．on all sides(=on every side)在各方面。到处
On aⅡsides there was great enthusiasm over his speech．
对他的演讲各个方面都有极大的热情。
On every side we have heard approval of his plan．
我们到处听到对他的计划的赞同。
They were trapped_____with enemies on all sides．
他们被包围了。敌人四面都是。
◇[考题15] Things that we're facing should be considered____，so that we'll deal with them well．
A．on all sides B．on their side
C．on the side D．by their side
[解析】 句意为“我们面对的事情应该考虑周到，以便我们可以处理得好。’on one's side表示“支持”，on the side表示“额外地”，by one’s side表示“在某人旁边”。依据句意可选出答案。 [答案]A
16．Tolerate vt.容忍；忍受；能服用；能经受(治疗)．宽恕
1 won't tolerate such behaviour．／your behaving inthisway．
不能容忍这种行为／你这样做。
The noise wag more than all she could tolerate．
她不能忍受那噪声。
Luckily，my parents were tolerant of my choice of music．
幸运的是父母宽恕了我对音乐的选择。
◇[考题16]-They don't have the best service，but I___-it because I love their food．
A．1ike B．tolerate C．bear D．stand
[解析] 分析句意可知所填词表示“容忍，不在意”的意思，故应为tolerate，而bear表示“承担；承受……重量／负担东西”等，stand虽也有“忍受、容忍”之意，但它指人面对艰难，痛苦，侮辱等不畏缩后退，不符语境。[答案] B
17．change one's mind改变主意
1 wanted to be a teacher when I was a child．But now I have changed my mind．
小时候我想当一名教师，但是现在我已经改变主意了。
He isn’t a reliable man because he often changeshis mind．
他不是一个可靠的人因为他经常改变主意。
◇[考题17] Nothing can stop a_____student_____his mind to
give up his studies．
A．promised；to change B．premised；changing
C．promising；changing D．promising．to change
[解析]promising为形容词，意为“有前途的；有希望的”。由stop sb．doing sth．“阻止某人干莱事”知第二空填动词的ing形式，这句话意为“没有什么能阻止一位有前途的学生改变主意而放弃自己的学业。”
[答案]C
18．concern vt.与……有关；涉及；影响到；使提心。
使关心(常与about，in。with搭配)
n．利害关系；关系重大的事‘
This article concerns a man who was wrongly imprisoned．这篇文章写的是一个被误抓入狱的人。
These problems concern all of us．
这个问题影响到我们大家每个人。
More and more people concern themselves about the environmental problem．越来越多的人关心起环境问题。
Mind your own concerns．管好你自己的事。
◇[考题18] (1)Anything that_______Mr．Green interests me．
A．concerns B．matters C．importances D．subjects
[解析] 句意为“任何关于格林先生的事，我都感兴趣。”concern与……有关，关于，涉及；matter要紧，有关系；importance重要，重要性；subject主题，科目。[答案]A
(2)It’s not necessary for you t0 be____about 0thers’business．
A．concern B．concern yourself
C．concerning D．concerned
[解析] ‘‘be concerned about…”为固定搭配，表示“关心……”。B项有较大干扰性，但此空前有be动词，若无be动词，则B项正确。[答案] D
19．Complete vt.完成；结束；使……完整；齐备
adj．完整的
The railway is not completed yet．铁路尚未完工。
We bou小t a house complete with furniture．
我们买了一套家具齐备的房子。
I need one more stamp before my collection is completed．
我集的邮票还差一张才完整。
complete／finish／end的区别：
它们都可作动词，表示结束一项任务或活动，常译为“完成”。
(1)finish是一般用法，常用作及物动词，其后跟名词、代词或动名词。.
(2)complete 是比较正式用语,一般表示对计划.事业 .建筑等的完后跟名词或代词,不跟动名词,不定式
(3)end 是指停止,结束某一过程
The headmaster has finished speaking .
When will the railway be completed .
They ended the meeting at five .
◇[考题19] (1)All the preparations for me task_____，and we're ready to start．
A．completed B．complete ‘
C．had been comDlered D．have been completed
[解析] 由题意知现在“一切准备工作已经完成”，故用现在完成时。[答案] D
(2)She______her set for dishes by buying the cups and saucers．
A．finished B．ended C．completed D．c1osed
[解析] 仅complcted可表示“使……完整”，而其他三词均表示“结束”。[答案] c
(3)Is the story he told us a_______one?
A．end B．finish C．stop D．complete
[解析] complete有形容词“完整的”的意思，可作定语或表语，其余三词无此义。 [答案]D ．
20. update vt. 更新;使现代化的;使……不过时;为……提供最新消息; 升级
An update model of this popular car .这种流行轿车的最新型号
The minister’s advises updated her on the situation.
部长的顾问给她将了最新的局势.
[考题20] He is so lazy that he has not ___-__his homepaper for yuover a year .
A. updated B. out of date C. dated D. up to date
[解析]updated 表示”更新”;out of date =dated 表示”过时的”upto date 表示”时髦的,合乎潮流的”.此处应为动词”更新”
[答案] A
21. adapt to 适应
I find it difficult to adapt model of this popular car .
这种很流行轿车的最新型号.
It is not wasy to adapt oneself to new conditions .
很难使一个人适应新环境.
adapt oneself to hot weather使某人适应热天气
[考题21] Such animals as dinosaurs died out because they couldn’t ______to the sudden change of the climate
A. suit B. keep C.adapt D.swithch
[解析]表示”适应环境.气候”用固定词组”adapt to ”suit”表示”衣服.颜色,发型等适合某人”,”keep “表示”保持”;switch 表示转换,故选adapt to [答案]C
22．类似于seldom的否定词
Barking dogs seldom bite．吠犬不咬人。
She seldom showed her feelings．她很少表露感情。
He seldom got a chonce to lead，did he?他很少有机会读书，是吗?
类似于seldom的否定词还有hardly，never．
little，few，rarely(罕见地)，scarcely(稀少地)等。
◇[考题22]1 watehed the film The Lord of the King(《指环王》)last night．Seldom______such a good film．
A．I did see B．have I seen
C．have seen I D．I saw
[解析] 本题考查了倒装与时态。seldom等否定副词位于句首时，主谓部分要实行倒装，且seldom多用于完成时的句子中。[答案]B
23．“look+adv．+prep．”词组小结
1ook forward to盼望
look down on／upon蔑视
look back on回顾，回忆
1ook out for提防；寻找
look in on顺便看望
Schoolboys always 1ook up to great athletes．
学校的男孩子们往往十分崇拜体育明星。
◇[考题23]I'm 1ooking forward with keen anticipation______with you and your colleagues．
Aon work B．to work C．on working D．to working
[解析]with keen anticipation表示“带有极大的热情”，作状语用，可以从句中剔除，从而可知句中隐含的词组look forward to，其中的to为介词，不可用其他词代替，后面也要用口．-ing形式，所以A、B、C三项被排除。[答案] D
24．hurt、wound injure 、harm表示“伤害”的区别hurt伤害，可指肉体上的轻伤，也可指感情上的挫伤wound刺伤，常指在打斗中，由外来暴力造成 的刀伤、枪伤，程度较重。injure伤害，受伤，多指意外事故对肉体、健康造成的伤害hurt伤害，多指对人的肉体或精神带来的伤害，不安或不便。
Telling a lie can harm／injure a person．
撒谎会伤害人。
◇[考题24】 Mrs．Green’s car ran into a large tree and she_______in the accident．
A．got badly hurt
Bwas lnjured badly
C．got badly wounded
D．was wounded badly
[解析] C、D两项应该被排除，因为wound多指在战斗、打斗中受的枪、刀伤，而此题指的是在意外事故(如交通事故)，而且从badly可知受伤很严重(hurt不严重所以A项被排除)。副词的位置在解答本题中不起决定性作用。[答案] B
25elect，select与chooSe表“选择’’的区别
三者均可表示“选择”，但choose是常用词，指凭个人的判断或意愿在所提供的人或物中挑选：
choose friends carefully．择友要谨慎。
We choose him(as)our menitor．我们选他当班长。
They elected a new mayor．他们选举了一位新市长。
Please select a few nice apples for mother．
请给妈妈挑几个好苹果。
[考题25](1)He is brave，hald-working and kind，so he was selected _______monitor of our class.
A. as a B. to be the C .a D. 不填
[解析] 本题没有直接考查select的同义词的区别，只考查了Select 的用法及后面的冠词问题。select后面可接as或to be , 但因为被当选的是这个群体(班)的惟一职务，所以名词前不用任何毫词.[答案]D
(2)一Have you________what you want to eat?
[解析】．本题实际上考查用法。前三个词中，只有choose后面可以接what从句。 [答案]A
26affair。event，accidentmcident-matter及business表示“事件”的区别affair作“事件”讲，复数作“事务”讲，是正式用词。指要做的事或已经发生的事，强调行为与动作及其过程；accident指意外或偶然多指不幸的事故，多有不良后果．business指事务，也指事情，常与affair替用，强调责任；event多指重大历史事件，也可指日常生活中较重要的事情和运动比赛的项目incident指与某人或某重要事件有关的。独立的事件，尤指军事、政治上或有争议的情况；matter指需要考虑或处理的情况。
◇[考题26] 0n New Year’s Eve，New York city holds an outdoor
______which attracts a crowd of a million or more people．
A. incident B. event C. selected D. choose
[解析] 从左栏看,简言之,incident 是小事;事件”;event 指大事affair指“日常琐事”，case指“案例”。举行户外活动庆祝新年应该是个重大事件，因此用event表示。又如：
Mind your own business .官自己的事.
He was injured in a road accident .他在一次交通事故中受伤了
The Lugouqiao incident 卢沟桥事件
27．含difficult的词组小结
have difficuly(in)doing sth．有困难做某事
with difficulty费劲地，吃力地
without difficulty不费劲地；轻易地
out ofa／the difficulty脱离困境
get／run into difficulties陷入困境
I don't have much difficulty with English grammar
我在学习英语语法时没有太多的困难。
There was little difficulty(in)finding him．
找到他没费什么劲儿。
◇[考题27] I wonder what difficulty he had_____the plan．
A. to carry out B.carrying out C.carryied out D.with carrying out
[解析] 分析句子结构在解本题乃至本类题目时作用极大。What作为difficulty的定语，一起作had的宾语，从而构成…he had what difficulty _____the plan 句式．，由此可知它符合句型have some(great,no，little，etc)difficulty(in)doing sth．。[答案]B
28．含once的词组小结
for once(至少)这一次(平时不这样)
at once立即；马上
once in a while／way偶尔；隔些时候
once more／again再一次；重新
once or twice几次；一两次
once in a blue moon极少；从不
For once he was telling the truth．
至少这一次他在说真话。
He’s behaving himself for(this)once．这一次他当回了个自己(有自己的主见、作法等)。。…’
◇[考题28] 一What a mess!T0m，who did this to make the moon so dirty ?
---_______,at least ,it’s not my fault.
A. At B .Once in a while C. For once D. Once again
[解析]本题考查含once的词组的辨别。各项含义及区别见左栏本题中“因为我刚放学回来，因此至少这一次不是我的错(暗示以前是个捣蛋鬼)”。 [答案]C
29．含effort的词组小结
make(an) effort(s)to do sth．)努力做某事
spare no effort不遗余力
with(an)effort费力地，使劲地
without effort毫不费力地
But all tllese efforts ended in failure．
但是所有的努力都化作泡影。
They concentrated their efforts on building the dam．
他们聚中精力建这座大坝。
I’ll spare no effort to help you．
我将不遗余力地帮助你。
◇[考题29]The rescue team made every_____to find tlle missing
mountain climber．(上海春季高考题)
A．force B．energy
C．effort D．possibility．
[解析] force表示“力量；权力”，energy表示“能量”；possibility表示“可能性”，均与语境体现出来的“竭尽全力去找失踪的登山者含义不符。这三个词均不可与make搭配。make every effort to do sth．为习语，表示“尽一切努力做某事”。[答案] C，极力
30．含attention的词组小结
pay attention to注意
catch／calL／attract one's attentm。
吸引某人的注意
turn one's attention to把某人的注意力转向
concentrate one's attention on ／upon
把注意力集中在
draw attention to对……表示注意
[考题30]Great attention must be paid_________education， especially in tlle countryside．
A．develop B．to develop
C．to developing D．developing
[解析] 从句中的pay可知考查词组pay attention to的用法。to
是介词，后面的动词要使用-ing形式。又如：Pay attention to your spelling(注意你的拼写)。[答案]c
31．含view的词组小结
come into view进入视野
in one's view据某人看来
in view可以看到(反义词：out of view)
point of view(view point)观点
The lake came into view／We came in view of the lake as we turned the corner．
我们转个弯就看到了那个湖。
In view of the weather．we will cancel the outing．
因天气关系，我们要取消此次郊游。
◇[考题31] The____of blood always makes him feel sick．
A．sight B．1ook
C．view D．scene (北京市宣武区模拟题)
[解析] 本题测试同义词的辨析：sight指以人文景观或历史遗迹为主的可供游览的地方，另外指眼之所见的场景，强调有人、物的活动在内(符合本题“场景”)；view多指在远处或高处展现在眼前的自然界 的山水风景；scene指具体的、某种周围一时的景色，以天然的景色为主；look指外表、人的神色，显然不合本题意。[答案]A
32．even if的用法及让步状语从句引导词
even if表示“即使”的意思。
Even if it rains cats and dogs，we will go to schoo1．
即使下着倾盆大雨，我也要上学。 引导让步状语从句的从属连词主要有although，though，even if，even though，as，despite，in spite of，no matter+特殊疑问词，及wherever，whatever等。
You wiIl succeed in the end even if you failed last time．
即使你上次失败了，最终你还是会成功的。
He didn't stop working though| he was i11．
他虽然病了，但未停止工作。
Child as he is．he knows a 1ot．
他虽然是个孩子，但懂得很多。
Whatever(=No matter what)you say，1 won't believe you．
无论你说什么，我决不相信你的话。
Despite I like the co1our．I don't like the shape．
尽管我喜欢那颜色，但不喜欢那形状。
◇[考题32](1)--She is young，she knows quite a 1ot things．
A．When B．However C．Although D．Unless
[解析]when引导时间状语从句、时态和逻辑有误；however可引导让步状语从句，但须与形容词或副词连用，意为“多么……”；unless引导条件状语从句，意思不通，这句话意思应为“尽管她很年轻，知道的事却不少。”【答案】 C
(2)______，he doesn't study well．
A．As he is clever B．Clever as he is
C．He is as clever D．As clever he is
[解析]as引导让步状语从句，表语置as之前，构成倒装语序，这是as引导让步状语从句的主要特点。这句话意为“尽管他很聪明，却不好好学习。”[答案] B
(3)Nobody believed him--what he said．
A．even if B．in spite
C．n0 matter D．contrary to
【解析] even if表示即使的意思；in spite后只有加0f才能构成短语“不管，尽管”的意思；contrary是“相反”的意思，均和句意不符。句意为“无论他说什么，没人能相信他。”[答案] C
33．过去分词作定语、表语的用法
(1)作定语：单个的过去分词作定语，绝大部分情况下放在所修饰的名词前面，过去分词短语作定语则一定要放在所修饰的名词后面。
fallen leaves落叶
people trapped in the lift 困在电梯里的人
(2)如果被修饰的词是由not any／no+thing／body／one所形成的不定代词或指示代词those等时，虽然一个单一的分词作形容词用，也要放在被修饰词之后。
1s there anything unsolved?
还有什么问题没有解决吗?
(3)过去分词作定语时与定语从句的关系：及物动词的过去分词可改为动词为被动形式的定语从句。
lost time=time which is lost
(4)过去分词作表语与被动语态的区别这两种结构的主要区别是：被动语态表示一个动作，过去分词作表语表示主语的特点或所处的状态。请比较下列句子：
Tne dass iS broken．玻璃杯坏了。(状态)
It was broken by my sister．它是我妹妹打破的。(动作)
◇[考题33](1)tHe Olympic Games，_______ in 776BC, did not include women players until 1912．(全国高考题)
A．first playing B．tO be first played
C．first played D ．t0 be first playing
[解析】 空白处相当于which was first played in 776Bc，即相当于一个非限制性定语从句。不定式作后置定语，在时态上相当于将来时， 不能表示已发生的动作；又因game与play之间存在动宾关系，所以 play要用被动形式。 [答案] c
(2)Cleaning women in big cities usually get_____by the hour． (全国高考题)
A．pay B．paying C．paid D．to pay
[解析] cleaning women与pay之间存在着动宾关系，因此本题应排除表示主动关系的A、B、D三项，从而一下子可以确定答案。get done是一种特殊的系表结构。[答案] C
(3)From his look on his face，the price of meat must have risen．v
A．disappointed B．disappointing
C．satis6ed D．satisfying
[解析] 因为“失望的”表情是由他自己发出来的，所以此处要用过去分词作定语。[答案]
语言点针对练习：
1. Though they had lost their___，they knew the sunset was______beautiful
A．sights；不填；sight B．sights；a；sight
C．sight；a；sight D．sight；不填；sight
2. For miles ad miles around me，there was nothing but a 1arge blanket of water，without a boat or ship
A．in sight B．on earth C．at a distance D．in place
3. They do no______ to anyone and it is wrong to_____them.
A．hurt；harm B．wound；hurt C．harm；hurt D．harm；wound
4. The boy used to be good．We are____about why he has changed that much.
A．worried B．pleased C．disappointed D．puzzled
5. Much attention_______ pronunciation if you want to speak Enghsh well．
A．should pay to B．must be paid
C．should be paid to D．will be taken of
6. You can hardly imagine the difficulty she had--enough evidence to prove the case
A．collected B．to collect
C．collecting D．to have collected
7. In this battle，about onethousand soldiers were killed and one thousand more_______.
A．injured B．wounded C．hurt D．damaged
8. The little child______by his father left home yesterday．
A．having been punished B．to be punished
C．punished D．who has been punished
9. Swan Lake is a famous ballet in four acts，_____on a German fairy tale．
A．basing B．based
C．bases D．to base
10. An agreemem____tomorrow will do good to every one of us． ．
A．to be signed B．being signed
C．signed D。having been signed
11. There are a 1ot of spelling mistakes；____it’s quite a good essay．
A．as though B．even though C．even if D．even so
12. The president said tlle report did not____his own views．
A．balance B．update C．ret]ect D．10cate
13. What____the experts lost is the interesting level of po11ution in our cities．
A．faces B．concerns C．bores D．relates
14. He fell from the tree and____so badly___that he was sent t0 a hospital immediately．
A．did；injure B．has；injured
C．was；injured D．is；injured
15. Joe seldom does her homework in the morning． ．
A．So does Mary B．Mary does too
C．Nor does Mary D．Mary doesn't too
16. The Foreign office deals with international________．
A．affair B．affairs C．things D_business
17. All the preparations for the task____，and weh ready to start．
A．completed B．complete
C．had been completed D．have been completed
18. After the war ended，Washington Was____the first President of the United States．
A．elected B．picked C．tried out D．selected
19. I used to cook with electricity，but I’ve____to gas．
A．changed B．exchanged C．switched D．transformed
20. The best way to deal with an impolite person is to____him．
A．ignore B．neglect C．omit D．overlook
二．完形填空
Many TV programs seem to be quite realistic(真实的).
ne ] watches TV often feels that whatever happened in the film may as 2 happen to him. With only a little 3 , every marl in the street may 4 to be a thief, or a spy, or a murderer. Jane had been watching a spy 5 at a friend's home. In it a young girl had been 6 and murdered.
She felt a little 7 。 She took a train back to the center of the city. There were a lot of people 8 with her, so she felt much safer. A man sat 9 her, reading a newspaper. She thought nothing of it 10 she saw him staring at her. 11 the film and feeling uncomfortable, she got off the train and went to the bus stop. When he got on the same bus as she did, she found he was 12 her. When she got off the bus, she was getting more and more frightened 13 the street almost became empty.
She 14 as quickly as she could. She could hear footsteps behind her, but she didn't dare to look over her 15 It seemed to have been hours before she 16 the front door. She felt for her keys, but was unable to find them. The footsteps stopped behind her. She felt a 17 on her shoulder. Instead of feeling hands round her 18 , she heard a pleasant voice.
“I 19 if I frightened you. I thought I 20 you in the train, but I was not sure. ”
1．A. he B. which C. who D. she
2．A. well B. soon C. though D. if
3．A. thinking B. imagination
C. consideration D. experience
4．A. seem B. appear C. turn D. come
5．A. film B. play C. TV D. show
6．A. watched B. followed C. searched D. hurt
7．A. frightened B. afraid C. excited D. surprised
8．A. talking B. sitting C. standing D. travelling
9．A. by B. opposite C. before D. behind
10．A. before B~ after C. as D. until
11．A. Seeing B. Thinking
C. Remembering D. Wondering
12．A. smiling B. staring C. glaring D. following
13．A. as B. when C. for D. and
14．A. ran B. rode C. drove D. walked
15．A. head B. arms C. shoulder D. back
16．A. closed B. opened C. entered D. reached
17．A. hand B. blow C. pressure D. hit
18．A. arms B. head C. neck D. shoulders
19．A. wondered B. regret C. sorry D. apologize
20．A. knew B. frightened
C. recognized D. noticed
三.改错:
As the population of the world keeps on grow, 1.-
it gets more and more difficult feed everyone. The 2.--
United States is one of the lucky country because it 3.---
grows enough food for itself and still has enough to 4。-
export to another parts of the world. One reason fo r 5._____
this is why the United States is a large country with 6._____
different kind of climate. Most of the central part 7.______
of the eotlntry is especial fit for raising grain. Wheat8._____
and corn are most important crops in this district. The 9._____
USA exports millions of tons of grain in every year 10._____
答案：
1．C 当“视力”讲时，sight是个不可数名词，无复数形式；当 “景象” 讲时，强调有人物的活动在里面，有时还可译成“奇观”，是个可数名词，但多用于a+adj．+sight句式。
2．A on earth表示“在世上；究竟”，at a distance表示“在远 处”，in place表示“在原来的位子上；适当的，合适的”，均不符合语境体现出来的“看得见；在视野之中”。
3．C do harm to为习惯用语，表示“对……有损害”。另一空暗含“伤害(自尊心，感情等)”。
4．D used to be good表示“曾经是个好孩子”，下文的changed that(=so)much表示他改变了许多，这件事使我们十分“不解；迷惑”。
5．C attention与pay之间存在动宾关系，所以pay应用被动式。pay attention to为固定词组，其中to为介词。
6．C 句中包含词组have dimculty in doing st’11．句型。
7．B battle表示“战斗；打斗”，因此在此中受伤要用wound，表示“受到刀枪伤”。
8．C所缺部分作定语，因为完成式不作定语，所以A项被排除；D项中时态不对；B项表示即将发生的动作，而文中的动作已发生(yeste-ay)
9．B空白处及后面的介词短语作先行词ballet(芭蕾舞)的定语，又因ballet与base之间存在动宾关系，所以base要用被动语态。
10．A tomorrow暗示“签合同”的动作发生在将来，所以要用不定式表示。又因sign与agreement之间存在动宾关系，所以用被动式。
11．D分号在此题中起着最重要的作用，因为有了相当于连词作用的分号，所以A、B、C均被排除。even so表示“即使是这样”，so代替前面的情况。
12．c句意表示“反映(他的观点)”。
13．B表示“某人面临某事”时，face的主语往往为人；bore(厌烦)与locate(定位)均不合题意。
14．c 句意表示“他从树上掉下来，并且伤得如此严重，以致于被立刻送到医院里。”injure(口￡．)“伤害”，由and连接的从句主语和谓语之间是被动的关系，应当用被动语态；从句 动作和主句动作是同时发生的，时态上应保持一致。
15．c句意表示“琼很少在早上做家庭作业，玛丽也是。”seldon为表示否定意义的副词。类似的还有scarcely，rarely，hardly，never等。
16．B 句意表示“对外办公室处理国际事务。”affairs复数形式多指重要或复杂的事务，business用来指与经济、商业有关的事务，thjngs指一般事情。
17．D all the preparations与complete之间应为被动关系，故排除A、B两项。依据we're ready to start，故排除C。
18．A在政治活动中当选用elect。
19．C 句意表示“我过去习惯用电煮饭，但现在改用煤气。”change改换，变化，指事物的变化过程，常用于change A into B／sth．changes from A to B／change to B；exehange“交换，调换”，指两事物间相互转换，如exchange A for B／exchange sth．with sth．；switcll‘‘改变、转变”，指转变位置、方向、思想、话题、方法、内容等；transforrn“改变；变化”，指事物的形状、外观、性质等变化。
20．A句意表示“对付无礼之人的最佳办法就是置之不理。”ignore多指有意忽略，或故意不理睬；neglect指对自己职责、义务、家庭等没有给予应有的重视，如neglect one's duty玩忽职守；omit指由于疏忽没注意而遗漏；everlook(监督检查时)遗漏，忽略。
二．完形填空：
1．C 2。A 3。B 4。B 5。A 6。B 7。A 8。D 9。B 10。D 11。C 12。D 13。 A 14。D 15。C 16。D 17。A 18。C 19。D 20。C
三.改错
1. grow-growing 2.feed前加to 3.country-countries 4.正确
5.another-other 6.why---that 7. kind-kinds 8. especial-especially 9. most前加the 10.去掉in
教材课后习题解答
Textbook Listening
Part 1①④⑥
Part 2①②③⑤⑦⑧⑨
Both①
Neither⑩
Word study
1． (1)Was elected (2)were injured
(3)Was fired (4)to switch
(5)reflected (6)is…telated
(7)tolerate (8)present
2．Positive,reliable，experienced，informed，talented，balanced；neutral：social，printed，current，critical；negative：careless，addicted，nosy
Grammar
1．Attributive：experienced talented organised
stolen addicted printed
Predicative：needed respected tolerated
2．talented journalists=journalists who are talented
an organized way=a way which is organized
stolen cultural 1elics=cultural relics which were stolen
people addicted to drugs=people who are addicted to drugs
printed articles=articles which are printed
3．(1)The telegram sent by my sister…
(2)Let’s try the bookstore opened last months．
(3)…housewives interviewed about…said…
(4)Three guns，stolen from the police station，were found
(5)…go to supermarkets crowded with shoppers．
4．(1)Three injured students were saved at 1ast．
(2)U8ed texthooks are often sold in China．
(3)His broken leg was wrapped carefully．
(4)A published novel is written by the 12-year-old girl．
(5)A newIy_built research center is for overseas students．
5．surprised，amazing，interested，boring，surprised，satisfied，noticed，interesting，disappointed．
单元知识梳理与能力整合
一、重点词汇
retire present ignore dimeuhy seldom media editor complete reflect tolerate elect AIDS citizen informed guard effort publishing injUre addict relidble relate attitude unique concern headline social fire switch disappoint spiritual affair polluter suffer face update arm
二、词汇拓展
1． difficulty-difficult(口办)困难的
2． informed___information(n.)消息；信息
3．relate---relation(n.)关系；联系
4．present---presently(adv．)现在
5．reflect--reneetion(n．)映像；倒影
6．social---socialism(n.)社会主义-socialist社会主义者
society(n．)社会(形态)
7．tolerate--~tolerant(嘶)容忍的；宽容的
8．cornplete--completely(adv．)完全地
9．arm----arms(n．)武器---army(n．)军队
三、重点短语
go up draw attention to bum down on aⅡsides for once change one's mind be addicted to current affairs suffer from
look up to even if fall in love…
四、句型与功能
1．There is a rumour that-clause．
2．keep／make／find．etc．+宾语+宾辛h
3…．it was the first time that-clause．
4．make+形式宾语it+for sb．to do sth．
5．What do you think of．．?
6．1 would rather choose…
7．What's your opinion?
8．I don't think we should choose…
9．What do you choose…?
10．Maybe it would be better to choose…
11．Perhaps…is important．
12．Our readers want to know about…
五、语法：过去分词作定语、语
1．过去分词作定语的特征
(1)展示出的时态特征 。
及物动词的过去分词含有被动或完成的含义。
What's tlle language spoken in Germany?德国讲什么语言?
②不及物动词的过去分词表示主动的完成意义。
fallen leaves=leaves that have fallen落叶
a faded rose=a rose that has faded一朵凋谢了的玫瑰
the risen sun=the sun that has risen升起的太阳
(2)位置及扩展成句的特征
①单个的过去分词作定语放在所修饰词的前面。
All the broken、windows have been repaired．
所有坏的窗户都已经修好了。
②过去分词短语作定语放在所修饰词的后面。
The bridge built 100 years ago is still in good condition．
这座修建于1前的桥仍然很坚固。
③过去分词作定语常可扩展为一个定语从句。 。
That report about the village is the best of its kind ever written(=that has ever been written)．
那篇关于农村的报道是同类中迄今最好的一篇。
(3)构成复合词的特征：有时通过一个名词或数词加名词的过去分词可构成生成形象的复合形容词。
a three-legged desk一张三条腿的桌子
2．过去分词作表语具有下列特征：
(1)表达动作的完成性，这与被动语态没有关系，下列动词常用作表语：come，go，arrive，fall，rise，set，finish，return
Autumn is come．=Autumn has come．
(2)表示主语受外界的情况处于被动的状态。有时只表示主语所处的状态。
The playground lay／appoared／1OOked quite deserted(荒芜的)。
She stood there surprised at tlle bad news．
He sounded frightened．听他说话的声音，可知他被吓坏了。
[例1] (20春招)一How are the team playing?
-They're playing well，but one of them--hurt．
A．got B．gets c．are D．were
[解析] 本题考查主谓一致及时态的用法。因主语oneofthem为单数，故 排除c、D两项；理解句意，结合语境便知：“受伤”是发生在过去，故用一般过去时。选项A，got是连系动词，作“变得”解，表示状态的改变，后跟形容词或过去分词作表语。题干中，空后hurt是过去分词作got的表语。又如：You might get burnt and you might drop tlle pan of burning oil．[答案] A
[例2] (全国高考)_____such heavy pollution already，it may now be too late to clean up the river．
A．Having suffered B．suffering C．To suffer D．Suffered
[解析] 本题检测学生在特定语境中对动词不定式和几种分词结构的判别与使用。通过分析题干句意可知，后面句子的动作发生在前面斌词suffer行为之后，因此，所设空中应该选用表示“已经完成’：状态的ing分词的完成式Having suffered(选项A)。B项为现在分词的一般形式，用来表示与句中动词同时进行或存在的情况；C项为不定式形式，表示一种趋势；以上两种情况均不合题意，故B、c两项均应舍去。题干中already也可起重要的提示与限制作用。D项表示被动含义，与句意不符，应排除，但统计数据表明，错误选项中恰好该项干扰最大。[答案]A
[例3] The job is____．None of us likes to do it．
A．tired B．tiring C．tire D．to be tired
[解析】 本题考查分词的用法。首先要掌握现在分词(doing)作表语的用法。及物动词的现在分词doing与自己的逻辑主语是主动关系。句意为“这项工作很累人，我们当中没有人喜欢做它。”[答案]B
[例4]I’m_____at your Success．
A．pleasing B．pleasant C．pleased D．please
[解析] 本题考查分词pleasing和pleased的区别。please是及物动词。句意为“我对你的成功感到非常高兴。”[答案]C
[例5]Helen isn't a____girl and she doesn't enjoy being with other people．
A．reasonable B．disable C．seeial D．reliable [解析] 从下文的“她不喜欢与其他的人在一起”，说明海伦是个比较白 闭的，不喜欢交际的(not seeial)的人，故排除“合理的”、“残疾的”及“可靠的”。[答案] C
[例6]The_____1ook on her face suggested that Michelle--the birthday gift from her boyfriend．
A．exciting；like B．excited；like
C．exciting；liked D．excited；1iked
[解析] 本题涉及到非谓语动词作定语问题以及suggest的用法问题。当表示“一张兴奋的脸孔”而不是“一张看了就兴奋的脸孔”时，用aIl excited face。当suggest作“建议”讲，其后的宾语从句应用(8hould)d0形式。[答案] D
[例7] (20北京春招)He looked around and caught a man_______his hand into the pocket of a passenger．
A．put B．to be putting C．to put D．putting
[解析] 此题考查非谓语动词作宾语补足语的用法。catch sb．doing sth．撞上某人做某事。如：，The farmer caught the boys stealing hi8 apples．农夫发现孩子们在偷他的苹果。[答案] D
Unit 2 知识与能力同步测控题一
(满分120分；时间100分钟)
一、单项填空(共15小题；每小题1分，满分15分)从A、B、C、D四个选项中，选出可以填人空白处的最佳选项。
1．Talking to a friend over the phone，you feel that you are close to each other_____the actual distante is not short．
A．so 1ong as B．so that C．as if D．even if
2．Seeing the happy___of children playing in the park，I’m full ofjoy and confidence in the future of our country．
A．sight B．scene c．view D．sight
3．I felt somewhere____and was about to leave when something occured which_____my attention．
A．disappointed；attracted B．disappointing；attacked
C．disappointment；paid D．interested；drew
4．In preparing scientific report of laboratory experiments， you should____you finds in 1ogical order and clear language．
A．write B．raise C．present D．put
5．A sheep_____on this kind of special grass usually grows much
faster than______on ordinary．
A．fed；one B．feeds；the one
C．fed；that D．feeding；it
6．一What did you think of the concert given by the famous Hong Kong singer?
一Not so good．In fact,l______to be a great disappointment．
A．turned up B．turned in
C．turned down D．turned out
7．The librarian promised to get the book for me_____she could remember who last borrowed it．
A．ever since B．in case
C．if only D．even if
8．--How does it happen that your business goes wrong?
一But I’ve done everything that is_____by law．
A．required B．judged
C．requested D．desired
9．There appeared a_______1ook on her face on hearing the unexpected news．
A．worrying B．worried
C．worry D．worries
10．In a way I can see what you mean，even though I don't_____ your point of view．
A．permit B．share
C．recognize D．agree
11．If you had______your test paper carefully before handing it in, you would have made few mistakes．
A．1ooked up B．thought about
C．gone over D．gone round
12．Although I like the appearanee of the house，what really made me decide to buy it was the beantiful_____through thewindows．
A．Vision B．1ook C．picture D．view
13．--What do you think of Julia?
-She could be a very attractive girl，but she______no attention to her address． ’
A．paid B．was paying
C．pays D．had paid ．
14．一You had no difficulty working out the maths problem．
-----.
A．No doubt B．Not at all ‘
C．None at all D．No problem
15．Henry can't attend the party_____at Tom's house at present because he is preparing the speech at the party____at Marie's house tomorrow．
A．held；being held B．to be held；to be held
C．to be held；held D．being held．to be held
二、完形填空(共20小题；每小题1．5分。满分30分)
阅读下面短文，掌握其大意，然后从16-35各题所给的四个选项(A、B、C、D)中，选出最佳选项。
Rupert Murdoch．the Australian-born American media ownerwas voted bost of British by the Sunday Express in London last week．
He is the most famous 16 owner in the world and 17 newspapers and TV channels across the world． 18 now he has been called the greatest 19 in Britain by one of his biggestrivals(竞争对手)．
The paper，which competes for 20 with Murdoch’s own papers．called him“the man who made modern Britain”and it 21 Murdoch for his willingness to take risks． 22 said he had brought a“revolution”(革命)to television and newspaperproduction．
Rupert Murdoch was born in Melboume． 23 ，in 1931．Today he is better 24 as the owner of News Corporation Ltd．a media group that owns many different 25 of meditelevision,films ,books，and the Internet．
26 becoming the success he is today，Murdoch studied Oxford University in Britain．He returned to Australia in 1952，when he 27 The Adelaide News from his father .His life since then can be seen as a series of international jumps in which he’s 28 more and more news-papers and TV stations．
Inthe 1960s,it was The Mirror in Sydney and The Sun in London；in the 1970s，he bought the New York Post；in the 1980s， he took on Hollywood when he bought 20 Century Fox and Fox TV．At this time he also bought the Times and the Sunday Times in London．And most 29 in the 1990s，he bought star Television in Asia．
His company has also formed a joint-Venture(合资的)television company with the Chinese Governmem．Phoenix Satellite Television Holdings Lld．(凤凰211视控股有限公司)．It 30 Six channels--Xingkongweishi，channel[V]，star Movies National Geographic．star Sports and ESPN-to millons of Chinese 31 ．
0ne 32 how Murdoch could have found the time for love and relationships since he owns such a big business．In 1967，he married Alisa Tmy，whom he met 33 she wits a reporter on the Sydney Daily Mirror．The couple got 34 in ．The next year，he married Chinese---born Wendy Deng．Deng，Murdoch’s third wife，is 37 years younger than Muntoch and used to work 35 Star TV in Hong Kong．The 71-year-old Murdoch is now father of five children after Deng gave birdh to a baby daughter last year．
16．A．media B．TV C．radio D．newspaper
17．A．edits B．buvs C．controls D．updates
18．A．However B．Until C．And D．Since
19．A．editors B．businessmen
C．reporters D.telegraphers
20．A．readers B．media C．headlilies D．journalists
21．A．eIected B．debated C．praised D．matched
22．A．He B．It C．Evergone D．who
23．A．England B．America C．Australia D．China
24．A．known B．received C．reflected D．informed
25．A．ways B．areas C．forms D．fields
26．A．Until B．After C．Since D．Before
27．A．took out B．took up C．took over D．took in
28．A．created B．sold C．published D．bought
29．A．recently B．immediately C．newly D．early
30．A．faced B．telated C．demonstrated D．introduced
31．A．readers B．1isteners C．、riewers D．media
32．A．bores B．concerns C．knows D．wonders
33．A．while B．because C．till D．once
34．A．married B．separated
C．disappointed D．tolerated
35．A．on B．among C．for D．within
三、阅读理解(共20小题；每小题2分。满分40分)
阅读下列短文，从每题所给的四个选项(A、B、c、D)中选出最佳选项。
A
A good modem newspaper is an extraordinary piece of reading．It is remarkable first for what is contains：the range of news from local crime to international politics ,from sports to business to fashion to science ,and the range of comment and special features as well ,from editorial page to feature articles and interviews to criticism of books ,arts ,theatre and music.A newspaper is even more remarkable for the way one reads it: never completely,never straight through ,but always by jumping from here to there ,in and out glancing at one piece ,reading another article all the way throngh，reading just a few paragraphs of the next．A good modern newspaper offers a variety to attract many direm readers，but far more than any one reader is interested in．What brings this variety together in one place in its topicality(时事性)，its immediate relation to what is happening in your world and your 1ocality now．But immediacy and the speed of production that goes、vith it means also that much of what appears in a newspaper has no more than transient(短暂的)value．For all these reasons，no two people really read the same paper: what each person does is to put together out of the pages of that day's paper，his own selection and sequence，his own newspape．For all these reasons，reading newspaper efficiently，which means getting what you want from them without missing things you need but without wasting time，demans skill,and self-awareness as you modify and apply me techniques of readjng． ．
36．A modem newspaper is remarkable for all the following except its_________．
A．wide coverage B．uniform style
C．speed in reporting news D．popularity
37．According to the passage，the reason why two people really read the“same”newspaper in that______．
A．people scan for the news they are interested in
B．different people prefer different newspapers
C．people are rarely interested in the same kind of news
D．people have different views about what a good newspaper is
38．It can be concluded from the passage that newspaper readers
A．apply reading techniques skillfully
B．jump from one newspaper to another
C．appreciate the variety of a newspaper
D．usually read a newspaper selectively
39．A good newspaper offers'a variety”to readers because____．
A．it tries to serve different readers
B．it has to cover things that happen in a certain locaIity
C．readers are difficuIt to please
D．readers like to read differet newspapers
40．The best title for this passage would be“______”．
A．The importance of newspaper Topicality
B．The Chacteristics of a Good Newspaper
C．The Variety of a Good New$paper
D．Some Suggestions on How to Read a Newspaper
B
The fonowlng is about the BBC and some other broadecasting
Stations in Britain．
┏━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━┓
┃station Broadcasting time Type of programmes
┣━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━┫
┃ BBC RADIO 1 24 hours a day Pop and light music ;
sports
BBC RADIO 2 24hours a day Pop and liaght music;sports
BBC RADIO 3 7a.m to about midnight serious music cultural programmes ;science talk
BBC RADIO 4 6 A.M to about midnight The main news about mid night service .
The BBC has local radio stations, such as Radio Wales which broadcasts some programmes in the Welsh language.The BBC has local radio stations which bring local newsAnd storied of local interest , such as Radio Lodon
Commercial radio has stations but it has many local ones;London has two –the London Broadcasting Company (LBC)And Capital Radio.
There is advertising on commercial radio but not on the BBC.
41．On which radio call you hear a commercial?
A．Radio 3． B．Radio 4．
C．Capital Radio． D。Radio London．
42．You need to listen to______for a programme on outer space .
A．Radio 2 B．Radio 3
C．Radio Wales D．LBC
C
This is not the world we know．The World is contrlled by computers．Men and women can be seen，but they are following the 0rders given to them by machines．The machines were designed by mad scientists． but at some point even the mad scientists were taken by their superinventions．
Does this scenario sound familiar? You have probably read something like it in magazines or science fiction books，or seen it in a science fiction film．Why is the tlleme so popular? 0ne of the reasons is undoubtedly that it reflects the fears of many people；fear of the unknown，fear of what is not understood or，at 1east，fear of something that is only partially comprehended． This fear is perhaps not very different from the way witches and black cats were feared in tlle Middle Ages．
The fact is that every day it seems that computers take contro1 of another area of our 1ives．Some factory jobs fire now done b
篇6：unit 10 学案(人教版高二英语上册学案设计)
Part1. Preview work
I. To get the main idea of each part
Part1 (1)
Part2 (2-6)
Part3(7)
II. Understanding the text
1 From the text , we can learn that Tacitus
A was a history writer
B worked for the local police
C was a close friend of Plony
D did research into volcanoes and earthquskes
2 What’s the passage mainly about?
A The death of Pliny the elder
B The eruption of Mount Vesuvius in 79AD
C The possible causes of volcanoes erupting.
D The ways of escaping from a volcano eruption
3 “The sight of it awoke the scientist in my uncle to go and see it from closer at hand(para2) The underlined parts refer to
A Mount Vesuvius , the uncle of the writer
B a mountain in the distance, Pliny the elder
C a cloud of unusual size and shape , qualities of a scientist like curiosity
D dark spots of dirt and ash; qualities of a scientist like curiosity
4 The writer didn’t think his uncle was afraid on the trip to Vesuvius because
A he had to rescue his friend’s wife Rectina
B he hurried to a place from which others were fleeing
C he had a good knowledge of how to survive a volcano eruption
D he was calm enough to write a report about what he observed
5 Pompy didn’t get away because
A he had to wait for a good wind
B there was no way out except by boat
C he was too scared to take any action
D he wanted to join Pliny in observing the eruption
6 led to the immediate death of the writer’s uncle
A The wrong decision he made
B His interest t study the volcano
C That he didn’t take the eruption seriously
D That he wanted to rescue Pomp after rescuing Rectina
7 What does the writer mean the last sentence of the letter?
A It is no easy task to be a history writer
B He reminds Tacitus of his uncle’s bravery
C He’s sorry that he can’t tell Tacitus more about the eruption
D He leaves it for Tacitus to decide which parts are important for his history book
III. Translate the following phrases and sentences.
1 吓死 2陷入恐慌
3 一场令人难忘的灾难
4 吸引我舅舅的注意
5 在附近6被……惊吓
7坐落在山脚 8企求某人去做某事
9合适的风向 10与其……不如……
11……是一回事，……是另一回事
12近在咫尺 13出什么事了？
14船完了
15.You can pick out the important bits , for it is one thing to write a letter , another to write history, one thing to write to a friend , another to write for the public.
Part2. Language points
1 The sight of it awoke the scientist in my uncle to go and see it from closer at hand.
He lives close at hand.
I always keep a dictionary ready at hand.
Your big moment is at hand..
由hand构成的其他短语还有：
by hand from hand to hand
hand in hand over
in hand hand down
hand out give sb a hand
hand in hand shake hands with
on one hand…on the other hand
2 Upon arrival , my uncle hugged Pompy and tried to give him courage.
examples:
On his arrival at the station , he was arrested by the police
On asking for the information, I was told I must wait.
On the news of his accident , I was sad.
此句中的upon同on，与带有动词性意义的名词或动名词连用，表示“一……就……”，“在……之时/ 后”例如 ：
1 我一到家，就发现家中被盗了
2 我一通过驾照考试，我爸爸就给我买了一辆小汽车
除upon/on表达之外，还可以用as soon as the moment immediately后跟从句，或用No sooner …than, hardly …when, scarcely…when
如：Please call me as soon as you get London
The moment he sat down, the doorbell rang.
His daughter ran to him immediately he got off the train.
No sooner dad he arrived than he was asked to leave again.
我一出门，天就下雨了
我一到上海就给你写信。
3 Ash and bits of rock that were burnt black falling onto the ship now, darker and more, the closer they went..
Examples:
More haste, less speed.
The more he talked, the more excited he became.
其构成：The+形容词和副词的比较级，The+形容词和副词的比较级。 后可接句子，也可接名词。在上下文清楚的情况下，还可省略。例如：
这首诗我越读的多，我越喜欢。
我们越是多聚在一起，就越快乐
越快，越好.
4 Helped by two slaves, he stood up and immediately fell down dead.
1) Full of fear, he returned home
2) Large or small, all countries are equal.
3) He stood there, dumbfounded.
那个老人躺在床上，一声不吭，回忆他的学生时代。
年轻时，我父亲不得不靠卖报纸为生。
5 He looked more asleep than dead.
他看上去预期说是死了不如说是睡着了
examples:
The book seems to be more a dictionary than a grammar.
She is more lovely than pretty.
More---than---在此表示同一事物的两种不同性质的比较，译为“与其说……不如说……”
Than后接与前同类的名词或形容词，而非比较对象。例如：
1 与其说他受了伤，不如说他受了惊.
2 与其说这岩石像牛，不如说他像马。
more than 其他意义：
Bamboo is used more than as a building material.
The terrible heat was more than the old man could bear.
They were more than happy to serve us..
他不仅仅是我们的老师，还是我们的朋友
超过一百个人参加了我们的社团
我们非常高兴再见到你
Translation
1胜利已在望，因此我们应该继续战斗。
2. 我一下车天就下雨了。
3 我越看她越觉得她可爱
4老师靠着课桌站着，说不出话来。
5我非常愿意用汽车把你送去
Grammar – Ellipsis
I. Knowledge about Ellipses
1. 简单句中的省略
1) 省略主语 祈使句中主语通常省略；其它省略主语多限于少数现成的说法。
(___) Thank you for your help.
(___) See you tomorrow.
(___) Doesn’t matter.
(___) Beg your pardon.2) 省略主谓或主谓语的一部分 (___) No smoking .
(___) Anything wrong ?
Why (______) not say hello to him ?
3) 省略作宾语的不定式短语,只保留to，但如该宾语是动词be或完成时态，则须在之后加上be或have:
–Are you going there? --Yes, I’d like to (______).
He didn’t give me the chance, though he had promised to (_________).
–Are you an engineer? --No, but I want to be.
–He hasn’t finished the task yet. --Well, he ought to have.
4) 省略表语
–Are you thirsty? --Yes, I am (______). His brother isn’t lazy, nor is his sister (______).
5) 同时省略几个成分
A: Have you finished your work ? B: ---(______) Not (______) yet.
2. 主从复合句中的省略
1) 主句中有一些乘法被省略
(______ ) Sorry to hear you are ill. (______ ) Pity that he missed such a good chance.
2) 主句中有提到的内容被省略
–Is he coming back tonight? --I think so.
–She must be busy now? --If so, she can’t go with us.
–Is she feeling better today? --I’m afraid not.
–Do you think he will attend the meeting? --I guess not.
# How so? Why so? Is that so? I hope so. He said so. I suppose/believe/hope not.
3. 并列句中的省略: 两个并列句中，后一个分句常省略与前一分句中相同的部分。
My father is a doctor and my mother (___) a nurse.
When summer comes, the day is getting longer and longer, and the night (______) shorter and shorter.
4. 其他省略
1) 连词的that省略: 宾语从句中常省略连词that，但也有不能省略的情况。
在定语从句中，that在从句中作宾语时可省略.凡是进行时态和被动语态的定语从句都可省略关系代词和be 动词。
2) 在某些状语从句中，从句的主语与主句的主语一致时，可省去“主语+be”部分
When (______) still a boy of 10, he had to work day and night.
She tried her best though (______) rather poor in health.
If (______) asked you may come in. If (______) necessary I’ll explain to you again.
3) 不定式符号to的省略
并列的不定式可省去后面的 to. I told him to sit down and wait for a moment.
help 当“帮助”讲时，后面的宾语或宾补的不定式符号to可带可不带.
I will help (____) do it for you. -
介词but前若有动词do,后面的不定式不带 to. The boy did nothing but play.
某些使役动词（let, make, have）及感官动词（see, watch, hear, notice, observe, feel, look at, listen to等）后面作宾补的不定式一定要省去 to, 在被动语态中须将to 复原。
I saw the boy fall from the tree. - The boy was seen to fall from the tree.
The boss made us work 12 hours a day. - We were made to work 12 hours a day.
主语从句中有动词do,后面作表语的不定式的 to可带可不带。
All we can do now is (____) wait.
find 当“发现”讲时，后面作宾补的不定式符号to可带可不带。
但如果是不定式 to be，则不能省略。
We found him (____) work very hard at the experiment.
She found him (________) dishonest.
4) 连词if在部分虚拟条件句中可省略，但后面的语序有变化。
If they had time, they would certainly come and help us.
Rewrite:________________________________________________
If I you, I would do the work better
Rewrite:____________________________________________
Should there be a flood, what should we do?
Rewrite: __________________________________________________--
5) 主句和从句各有一些成分省略。
The sooner (you do it), the better (it will be).
II. Practice
1. _______ time, he’ll make a first-class tennis player.(北京)
A. Having given B. To give C. Giving D. Given
2-Susan, go on. Your sister is cleaning the yard.(NMET20030)
--Why _____? John is sitting there doing nothing
A. him B. he C. I D. me
3. Generally speaking,_____ according to the directions, the drug has no side effect.(2003 上海)
A. when taking B. when taken C. when to take D. when to be taken
4. Unless_____ to speak, you should remain silent at the conference.(2003上海春)
A. invited B. inviting C. being invited D. having invited
5. ---The boys are not doing a good job at all, are they ?(2003北京春)
---________________.
A. I guess not so B. I don’t guess C. I don’t guess D. I guess not
6. The man we followed suddenly stopped and looked as if ____ whether he was going in the right direction.(2003春)
A. seeing B. having seen C. to have seen D. to see
7. When______, the museum will be open to the public next year.(上海春)
A. completed B.completing C. being completed D. to be completed
8. The director gave me a better offer than _____( 上海)
A. that of Dick’s B. Dick’s C. he gave Dick D. those of Dick
9. –Does your brother intend to study German?(1998上海)
-- Yes, he intends _______.
A. / B. to C. so D. that
10. –Alice, why didn’t you come yesterday? ( MET)
--- I ________, but I had an unexpected visitor.
A. had B. would C. was going to D. did
Answers 1-5 DDBCD 6---10 DACBC
篇7：unit 3 全单元教案(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
Topic: art and architecture
1.Stimulate the students’ interests in talking about art and architecture
2.Cultivate the students’ ability of speaking, reading, discussing.
3.Enable the students to learn some useful words and expressions: architecture, architect, prefer, design, style
I would not feel happy if …
I would not feel happy if ….
I don not get very excited about …
I really prefer…
I can not stand
Teaching important point:
1. Enable the students to master the ways of discussing differences between modern and traditional things, to encourage them to talk about their preference.
2. Help the students to learn about the past participle: used as object complement
Teaching difficult point:
Inspire the students to express their design of house.
Teaching methods: free talk, communicative method to improve students’ speaking ability and communicative skills.
Teaching aids: multimedia. recorder.
Teaching procedures:
Period 1: Warming-up and Speaking
Period 2: Reading
Period 3: Language study
Period 4: Listening and writing
Period 5: Integrating skills
Period 1：Warming up and Speaking
Step 1. Greetings and warming-up
T: Good morning, class.
S: Good morning, Miss Qiu.
T: where are you from, a city or a small town?
Can you describe the buildings in your hometown?
What kind of buildings do you live in, a traditional house or an apartment?
S: …
(Show students two pictures, a tall building and a traditional yard.)
T: what can you see in the two pictures?
S: We can see two different styles of house: block of flats and traditional house.
T: What is the difference between them?
Suggested answers:
Block of flats Traditional house
Modern.
Convenient.
The rooms are big.
Every flat has a toilet and bathroom.
Not much contact with their neighbors.
People often feel lonely.
Flat roof.
… Old-style.
The rooms are small.
Sometimes no toilet or bathroom.
Life is much more interesting. Neighbors get on well with each other. People can grow flowers in the yard.
The roof is sloping.(why?)
…
T: In which house would you prefer to live? Why?
S: I like living in …. because….
I prefer living…
I’d rather live…
(For example, living in the small house makes me feel warm. I like making friends with my neighbors. It looks like a big family. Encourage them to express their ideas freely.)
T: Buildings in the different places are different. So what words and phrases do you think will be useful when you want to talk about art and architecture?
(Show the students some different kinds of houses, and ask them to describe them.)
S: appearance: high, low, great. The palaces were large and beautiful, and they often looked like something out of a fairy tale.；materials: brick, stone, steel, glass, wood…
T: If you were free to design your own dream house, what would that house look like? What materials would you use? Explain why you made certain choices about your dream house?
S: ……
Step 2 Speaking
T: Now let’s move to the speaking part. Turn to P18. Please listen to the sample dialogue .Pay attention to the ways how to express their preferences.
(After listening to the dialogue for once)
T: Ok! The dialogue is about two persons talking about their preference for styles of architecture. The noun form of “prefer” is “preference”. The stress should be put on the first syllable. Please read the word after me .
S: ……
T: There are some useful expressions in the dialogue. Such as “I wouldn’t feel happy if …”
“I prefer something that…” “I don’t get very excited…”
T: Now please look at the pictures and talk with your partner which of the things below you prefer. Try to explain why you prefer one thing to another.
S: …
(Show some chairs on the screen)
T: In your dream houses, are there any chairs? Which one do you like? Why?
Sample dialogue:
A: which do you like better, classical chairs or modern chairs?
B: I prefer modern chairs.
A: Why?
B: In my opinion, modern chairs are lighter and more colorful. They are comfortable.
Step 3 . Homework
Decorate your bedroom and classroom. And talk about your decoration.
Period 2: Reading
Step1: Pre-reading
(Show pictures of both modern architecture and classical architecture)
T: We’ve really had a wonderful tour around the world last time, seeing the marvelous architecture home and abroad, modern and classical. I hope you enjoy that… but I wonder if all of you can recognize some of the most famous architecture.
S: Sydney House; the Eiffel Tower; the Temple of Heaven…
T: Among all of these pictures, which ones belong to modern architecture?
S: …
T: How do you know which ones belong to modern architecture? What’s the difference between modern architecture and classical architecture?
S: …
T: If you want to know more and to enjoy the beauty of modern architecture, you’d better join us, as we are going to have a new journey, the journey to the world of modern architecture.(Show modern architecture on the screen)
Step2: While-reading
1. Fast- reading
T: Q1:Wha’s the difference between modern architecture and classical architecture?
Q2: What kind of materials is used? What other materials do you know?
Q3: What’s the characteristic? How do people feel towards modern architecture?
Difference
Modern architecture Classical architecture
Materials Steel, iron, glass… Stone, brick, wood…
Characteristics Huge; like boxes; unfriendly Beautiful, closer to nature
2. Careful-reading
T: Now please find out the information according to the key words on the screen.
Modern architecture
Q1: When was modernism invented? -----1920s
Q2: How many architects are there in the text? ---Antonio Gaudi/ Wright
Q3: What did Gaudi want to be used in his works? What’s the characteristic of his architecture? How is his architecture like?
----Natural materials/ like a dream, full of fantastic colors and shapes.
Q4: What inspired Wright? ----Japanese seashells
Q5: How many examples are there in the text?
----The Opera House/ the new Olympic Stadium
Q6: How do they look like? ----Seashell/ nest
Q7: What do they (two architects / two examples) have in common? ---Nature
3. Listening
T: While listening, please pay attention to the key points in the text. (Show the key points on the screen)
Step3. Post-reading
Interview (group work)
Step4. Homework
Report what you have learned about modern architecture next time.
Period 3: Language study
Step 1 Lead-in
T: Hello, everybody, yesterday we have seen a lot of wonderful modern architectures and got to know some famous architects. Today I’d like to introduce you one of my friends. He is an architect. Who can tell me the meaning of “architect”. (a person who designs buildings). He lived in this house when he was young. Do you think this house beautiful or not beautiful? (not beautiful) Can you use another word to replace “not beautiful”. (ugly). So when he became an architect, he designed some pretty houses. Not long ago he designed a new house for me. Let’s go and see my new house.
Step 2 Vocabulary
T: Welcome to my new house. Could you say something about my new home?
T: I’m not alone here, because I have two neighbors. Do you know who are they and where they live? (nest, dog house)
T: Let’s learn some new words of house.
(balcony concrete nest brick roof)
Try to remember these new words, then fill in the blanks.
1. An area with a wall or bars around it, joined to the outside wall of a building ________________.
2.A strong construction material which is a mixture of stone, and sand and water _________________
3.A shelter made by a bird to hold its eggs and young ____________
4.The structure on the top of a building to keep the rain out_________
Step 3 Word Study
T: Can you tell me which is the most ancient building in my yard? (nest)
A nest is to a bird what a house to a man.
Who can tell me the meaning of this sentence?
(鸟剿和鸟的关系就和房子和人的关系一样)
T: Good. Let’s try another one
Water is to fish what air is to men.
(水和鱼的关系就于空气和人的关系一样)
T: Well done. These two sentences have something in common-they are using the same sentence pattern. What is it?
S: →A is to B what C is to D
T: Very good. Now I will show you more pictures, you should find out the relationship between these pictures, and create sentences using the above pattern.
Fur is to a fox what the_____is to a banana.
____are to a house what words are to a text.
An architect is to_______what a painter is to art.
A___is to a boat what an engine is to a car.
A____is to a fisherman what a gun is to a hunter.
Arms are to the body what_______are to a tree.
Step 4 Grammar
T: I’m very glad that you like my new home. Our new school is far away from the downtown, so a new market is build near our school. I’ll guide you to the market to see what you can do there.
(show the Ss the picture and ask them to describe it.)
T: What can you see in the market? Let’s see what can we do here?
For examples: I can have my hair cut here. I can have my bike mended.
Please make similar sentences.
S:…
T: In all these sentences we use a sentence pattern-“have something done”.
Now let’s see the pairs of sentences, and compare A and B.
A: I can have my bike mended
B: I can have the car waiting for me.
A: I found myself tied to a tree.
B: I found myself walking in a forest.
T: when we use –ing form, we are using passive voice. When we use –ed form, we are using active voice.
→ passive voice: -ed
active voice: - ing
T: Now let’s do some exercises.
Matching
Did you find the city done?
When will he ever get the work greatly changed?
She can’t make herself called.
Next week I’ll have my bedroom understood.
You’ve got to keep the door locked.
I got the watch repaired.
She heard her name decorated
Completing
I don’t want any bad words____(say) about him behind his back.
Please get the work____(do) as soon as possible.
I’ll have the materials_____(send) to you next Monday morning.
She won’t have her long and beautiful hair____ (cut) short.
You should make your voice______(hear).
I want you to keep me_________(inform) of how things are going with you.
The rent sounds reasonable. How would you like it________(pay).
At last I succeeded in making myself__________(understand).
We’ll move to the new school, and four people will share one room. There will be a competition on decorating your room. The most beautiful and most special room will he the winner. Now work in groups of four to design your room. Five minutes later the group leaders should give a simple report. And pay attention to use –ed form in your report.
Step 5 Homework
1.Workbook page 97, exercises 1-5
2.Workbook page 98, exercises 1-2
Period4: listening and writing
Step 1 : Greeting and Warming up
T: The National Day is coming. I know most students in our class are waiting for the exciting day, so am I .On holiday ,we can do many exciting things. Such as going shopping, visiting beautiful place, visiting good friends…Now I will ask some students to share your ideas. **, Please, what are you going to do on the National Day?
S: …
T: What about you? What’s your opinion?
S: …
T: On National Day, what cloth will you put on? School uniforms or cloth with personal style?
T: …
T: I think most students in our class will put on cloth with personal style ,because this kind of cloth can make us feel confident .Right?
S :…
T: It is time to buy some furniture. What kind of furniture will you buy? And why do you prefer them?
S:…
T: For most young person, their choices in buying furniture is very much like buying clothes, while old people often choose traditional furniture that is made of strong materials and can be used for a long time .
Step 2. Listening
T: Today, we are going to learn the listening part . Turn to P18. This dialogue is about a young married couple, Danny and Amy and a shop assistant.. They want to buy some furniture for their new house. They visit a shop and talk with a shop assistant about their tastes and preferences.
(Play the tape twice for the students to listen and finish the exercises by themselves. They may check the answers in pairs. Then play it a third time for the students to check their answers. Check them with the whole class in the end..)
Step 3. writing
T: Do you think the building in our school is beautiful?”
S1: It is very beautiful…
S2: The school looks like a desert ,The walls are white-washed and there aren’t any art works on them.
T: We think the building would be more beautiful if the school would be decorated with paintings ,photos and art works. We think art in the school could give us many new experiences and enrich our lives. But suppose that the school does not have a lot of money. How can our school be decorated? Now please work in groups of 4 to make a plan that show how the whole school can be decorated? I will give you 3 minutes to have a discussion.
Suggest answer:
1. Mangy art works ca be made by teachers and students.
2. Art posters can be used for decorating.
Step 4. Homework.
T: Please write a letter to the headmaster explaining how you want to decorate the school with art works. Describe the art of your choice, what function it should have in your school and why it is important to have art in school buildings.
Paragraph1. Explain why the school should be decorated.
Paragraph2. Explain what function the art should have in the school.
Paragraph3. Describe different types of art works that could be chosen and where they should be hung up in the school.
Paragraph4. Discuss the different prices of different art works and write a plan to decorate the school as well as possible using little money .
Period 5: Integrating skills
Step 1. Revision:
T: Dear class, I’m especially happy these days, because I’ve just bought a new house. It’s very beautiful. Look, here it is. I want to share my happiness with you. So would you like to help me design my house? How should I decorate my room? Please discuss it and give me some advice, OK?
(Show them the sentence pattern on the screen to revise the grammar.
--- You should have your walls painted white.
--- You had better have … done. )
T: Now I will call out some pairs to report their design. which group will give me good suggestions?
S:…
T: Thank you very much! You’re good designers. I’ll decorate my room according to your design.
Step 2. Lead-in
T: Now after I finished decorating the rooms, I moved into my new beautiful house. But what should I do to deal with my old house? Should I pull it down? No, I don’t want to do that. Anyway it’s so lovely a house. Should I let it stand empty? No, not a good idea. I want to give it a second life. What shall I do? Please discuss again in groups and this time give me advice on how to deal with the old house.
S:…
T: Wow, you have so many wonderful ideas! I think I like to change it into a beautiful teahouse and I can rent it to somebody else since I am too busy to run it myself. And thus I can give my old house a second life. Thank you very much! Would you like to come in and have a cup of tea in my teahouse some day?
Step 3. Fast reading on “ Factory 798 ”
T: Thank you for your ideas to give my old house a second life. And the same story goes with another old factory which is no longer used in Beijing. It is the famous place called “Factory 798”. Has anybody ever heard of that? If no, let’s open our books and read the passage on Page 23. Try to find out: “What is Factory 798? ” I will give you 2 minutes.
(a few minutes later. )
T: Who has found out the answer?
S: → an old army factory ; an arts centre;
Step 4. Listening and reading
T: Now, let’s listen to the tape and get a better understanding of the text. Please follow the tape in a low voice and pay attention to the pronunciation of the new words and phrases which you’re not sure of. At the same time, please try to find out the following new language points in the text and see how much you can understand them in English.
( Show the language points on the screen. )
1. pull down
2. stand
3. with… aid
4. remind … of
5. set aside
Step 5. Careful reading
T: Now let’s get some detailed information about Factory 798. Please read the second paragraph of the passage carefully again and find out:
Q1:What was Factory 798 like?
→ huge factory halls of bricks
→ small round windows that remind you of ships
→ bent roofs
→ 20-foot high walls of glass
Q2:When was Factory 798 built?
--- We’ve known that Factory 798 was built in 1950s.
Q3:As time went by and things developed, what happened to it then?
→ no longer used/ needed
→ stood empty
Q4: What has happened to it now?
→ turned into an arts center
Q5:Why was Factory 798 welcomed by painters, music bands, artists and musicians?
(Check the answers with Ss one by one, explain the language points meanwhile. Explain some difficult sentences in the text at the same time)
Step 6. Retelling
T: Now it’s time for you to read the text by yourselves and try to summarize the text. That is to say, suppose you are a journalist from CCTV 9 and you’ve just paid a visit to the famous Factory 798. Please make a TV program to introduce Factory 798 to our citizens in your own words. I’ll give you three minutes to read through the text by yourselves and get prepared for the retelling, OK?
S: …
Step 7. Discussion
T: In almost every city around the world, there are old buildings which are no longer used, such as schools, hospitals, factories or even churches. What do you think people should do with them? Why?
S1: To pull down the old buildings and set up new modern ones to keep up with the pace of the society.
S2: New uses should be given to old special buildings. It’s a great way to save the architecture from the past.
Step 8. Homework.
1. Finish the program about Factory 798 as a TV reporter.
2. Make your plan about how to reuse our old school buildings.
篇8：Unit 3 全单元教案(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
Period 1：Warming up, Speaking & Listening
Step 1. Greetings and warming-up
Greet the students as usual.
Ask the Ss to talk about their hometown and their houses.
Qs: where are you from, a city or a small town?
Can you describe the buildings in your hometown?
What kind of buildings do you live in, a traditional house or an apartment?
Show students two pictures, a tall building and a traditional yard.
T: what can you see in the two pictures?
What is the difference between them?
(When the Ss describe the pictures, remind the students to think about the differences in the two pictures. The students may have different opinions. Encourage them to think out reasons as many as possible. They may have a discussion.)
Suggested answers:
Block of flats Traditional house
Modern.
Convenient.
The rooms are big.
Every flat has a toilet and bathroom.
Not much contact with their neighbors.
People often feel lonely.
Flat roof.
…
Old-style.
The rooms are small.
Sometimes no toilet or bathroom.
Life is much more interesting. Neighbors get on well with each other. People can grow flowers in the yard.
The roof is sloping.(why?)
…
In which house would you prefer to live? Why?
S: I like living in ….because….
I prefer living…
I’d rather live…
The students should tell others their reasons to support their choices. For example, living in the small house makes me feel warm. I like making friends with my neighbors. It looks like a big family. Encourage them to express their ideas freely.
T: Buildings in the different places are different. So what words and phrases do you think will be useful when you want to talk about art and architecture?
Show the students some different kinds of houses , ask them to describe them.
Collect their answers.( appearance: high, low, great, The palaces were large and beautiful, and they often looked like something out of a fairy tale.；materials: brick, stone, steel ,glass, wood…)
T: If you were free to design your own dream house, what would that house look like? What materials would you use? Explain why you made certain choices about your dream house?
Architect: one who designs the construction of buildings or other large structures.
Give the students enough time to discuss the question. Collect their answers.
Step 2 Speaking
Books open, page 18. Ask the students to listen to the sample dialogue and follow the tape. Study the useful expressions. Remind them to learn the structure how to express their preferences.
Practice. Ask them to look at the pictures and choose the item they prefer. Try to explain the reasons.
Two tasks: One is to talk about traditional and classical furniture. And the second task is choosing a picture to decorate their room.
T: In your dream houses, are there any chairs?
(Show some chairs) which one do you like? Why?
When they answer the question, encourage them to use expressions in the following table. A moment later, ask them to act out their own dialogue.
Sample dialogue:
A: which do you like better, classical chairs or modern chairs?
B: I prefer modern chairs.
A: Why?
B: In my opinion, modern chairs are lighter and more colorful. They are comfortable.
A:…
Step 3 : Preparation for listening
T: You have already designed your own dream house , it is time to buy some furniture. What kind of furniture will you buy? And why do you prefer them?
Have a short discussion in pairs. You can introduce names of furniture, such as heater, air-conditioner and so on.
Step 4. Listening.
Books open, Page 18, listening part. It is a talk between a young married couple, Danny and Amy and a shop assistant.. They want to buy some furniture for their new house. Ask the students to go though the exercises and make sure what to do.
Play the tape twice for the students to listen and finish the exercises by themselves. They may check the answers in pairs.
Then play it a third time for the students to check their answers. Check them with the whole class in the end.
Step 5.Homework
1.Decorate your bedroom and classroom. And talk about your decoration.
2.Find out about the history of art and architecture, names of artists and architects, famous buildings and works of art in the world as much as possible. Share the ideas with others.
Period 2&3: Reading
Step1: Pre-reading
----Enjoy pictures of both modern architecture and classical architecture
1. Greetings
T: We’ve really had a wonderful tour around the world last time, seeing the marvelous architecture home and abroad, modern and classical. I hope you enjoy that… but I wonder if all of you can recognize some of the most famous architecture.
2.Brainstorming or guessing game
---Name the pictures: Sydney House; the Eiffel Tower; the Temple of Heaven…
Q: Among all of these pictures, which ones are different from others? Or you may say which ones belong to modern architecture.
SS: …
Q: How do you know which ones belong to modern architecture? What’s the difference between modern architecture and classical (ancient) architecture?
SS: …
T: If you want to know more and to enjoy the beauty of modern architecture, you’d better join us, as we are going to have a new journey, the journey to the world of modern architecture.
Step2: While-reading
1. Fast- reading
----Find the difference between modern architecture and classical architecture in the text.
Q: what’s the difference between modern architecture and classical architecture?
Difference
Modern architecture Classical architecture
Materials Steel, iron, glass… Stone, brick, wood…
Characteristics Huge; like boxes; unfriendly Beautiful, closer to nature
Q: What kind of materials is used? What other materials do you know?
Q: What’s the characteristic? How do people feel towards modern architecture?
2. Careful-reading
----Find out the information according to the key words
Modern architecture
Q1: When was modernism invented? -----1920s
Q2: How many architects are there in the text? ---Antonio Gaudi/ Wright
Q3: Where were they from? ----Spanish/ American architect
Q4: What did Gaudi want to be used in his works? What’s the characteristic of his architecture? How is his architecture like?
----Natural materials/ like a dream, full of fantastic colors and shapes.
Q5: What inspired Wright? ----Japanese seashells
Q6: How many examples are there in the text?
----The Opera House/ the new Olympic Stadium
Q7: How do they look like? ----Seashell/ nest
Q8: Why do we call the Olympic Stadium in Beijing” the Bird’s nest”?
Q9: What do they (two architects / two examples) have in common? ---Nature
3. Listening
----While listening, pay attention to the key points in the text.
Step3. Post-reading
1. Task 1: Interview (group work)
2. Task2: Design (group work)
--- Design the architecture of a new school.
---Report four elements: what kind of materials is used? / Why do you design in this way? / How do the architecture look like? / What’s the style?
Step4. Homework
1. Exchange designs with your classmates and exhibit them.
2. Report what you have learned about modern architecture next time.
Period 4: Language study
Step 1, Lead-in
T: Hello, everybody, yesterday we have seen a lot of wonderful modern architectures and got to know some famous architects. Today I’d like to introduce you one of my friends. He is an architect. Who can tell me the meaning of “architect”. (a person who designs buildings). He lived in this house when he was young. Do you think this house beautiful or not beautiful? (not beautiful) Can you use another word to replace “not beautiful”. (ugly). So when he became an architect, he designed some pretty houses. Not long ago he designed a new house for me. Let’s go and see my new house.
Step 2, Vocabulary
T: Welcome to my new house. Could you say something about my new home?
T: I’m not alone here, because I have two neighbors. Do you know who are they and where they live? (nest, dog house)
T: Let’s learn some new words of house.
(balcony concrete nest brick roof)
Try to remember these new words, then fill in the blanks.
an area with a wall or bars around it, joined to the outside wall of a building ________________.
A strong construction material which is a mixture of stone, and sand and water _________________
a shelter made by a bird to hold its eggs and young ____________
the structure on the top of a building to keep the rain out_________
Step 3, Word Study
T: Can you tell me which is the most ancient building in my yard? (nest)
A nest is to a bird what a house to a man.
Who can tell me the meaning of this sentence?
(鸟剿和鸟的关系就和房子和人的关系一样)
T: Good. Let’s try another one
Water is to fish what air is to men.
(水和鱼的关系就于空气和人的关系一样)
T: Well done. These two sentences have something in common-they are using the same sentence pattern. What is it?
→A is to B what C is to D
T: Very good. Now I will show you more pictures, you should find out the relationship between these pictures, and create sentences using the above pattern.
Fur is to a fox what the_____is to a banana.
____are to a house what words are to a text.
An architect is to____________what a painter is to art.
A___is to a boat what an engine is to a car.
A____is to a fisherman what a gun is to a hunter.
Arms are to the body what_______are to a tree.
Step 4, Grammar
T: I’m very glad that you like my new home. Our new school is far away from the downtown, so a new market is build near our school. I’ll guide you to the market to see what you can do there.
show the Ss the picture and ask them to describe it.
--What can you see in the market?
--Let’s see what can we do here?
Give examples: I can have my hair cut here.
I can have my bike mended.
Ask the Ss to make similar sentences.
T: in all these sentences we use a sentence pattern-“have something done”.
Now let’s see the pairs of sentences, and compare A and B.
A: I can have my bike mended
B: I can have the car waiting for me.
A: I found myself tied to a tree.
B: I found myself walking in a forest.
Watch more sentences on page 22.
Examine all the sentences carefully, and find out when we use –ing form and when we use –ed form.
→ passive voice: -ed
active voice: -ing
Look at the pictures, can you find out another difference between –ing form and –ed form.
Let’s do some exercises.
Matching
Did you find the city done?
When will he ever get the work greatly changed?
She can’t make herself called.
Next week I’ll have my bedroom understood.
You’ve got to keep the door locked.
I got the watch repaired.
She heard her name decorated
Completing
I don’t want any bad words____(say) about him behind his back.
Please get the work____(do) as soon as possible.
I’ll have the materials_____(send) to you next Monday morning.
She won’t have her long and beautiful hair____ (cut) short.
You should make your voice______(hear).
I want you to keep me_________(inform) of how things are going with you.
The rent sounds reasonable. How would you like it________(pay).
At last I succeeded in making myself__________(understand).
We’ll move to the new school, and four people will share one room. There will be a competition on decorating your room. The most beautiful and most special room will he the winner. Now work in groups of four to design your room. Five minutes later the group leaders should give a simple report. And pay attention to use –ed form in your report. Here are some phrases to help you:
Step 5, Homework
1.Workbook page 97, exercises 1-5
2.Workbook page 98, exercises 1-2
Period 5: Integrating skills
Step 1. Revision:
( Talk about new house decoration to revise the grammar: have… done)
--- Dear class, I’m especially happy these days, because I’ve just bought a new house. It’s very beautiful. Look, here it is. I want to share my happiness with you. So would you like to help me design my house? How should I decorate my room? Please discuss it and give me some advice, OK?
--- You should have your walls painted white.
--- You had better have … done.
A few minutes later, call out some pairs to report their design. >
--- Ok, which group will give me good suggestions?
--- Thank you very much! You’re good designers. I’ll decorate my room according to your design.
Step 2. Lead-in
( Talk about how to deal with the old house.)
--- Now after I finished decorating the rooms, I moved into my new beautiful house. But what should I do to deal with my old house? Should I pull it down? No, I don’t want to do that. Anyway it’s so lovely a house. Should I let it stand empty? No, not a good idea. I want to give it a second life. What shall I do? Please discuss again in groups and this time give me advice on how to deal with the old house.
< Ss discuss and give advice. >
--- Wow, you have so many wonderful ideas! I think I like to change it into a beautiful teahouse and I can rent it to somebody else since I am too busy to run it myself. And thus I can give my old house a second life. Thank you very much! Would you like to come in and have a cup of tea in my teahouse some day?
Step 3. Fast reading on “ Factory 798 ”
--- Thank you for your ideas to give my old house a second life. And the same story goes with another old factory which is no longer used in Beijing. It is the famous place called “Factory 798”. Has anybody ever heard of that? If no, let’s open our books and read the passage on Page 23. Try to find out: “What is Factory 798? ”
< Ss fast reading for a few minutes. >
--- Who has found out the answer?
→ an old army factory ; an arts centre;
Step 4. Careful reading
--- Now let’s get some detailed information about Factory 798. Please read the second paragraph of the passage carefully again and find out:
--- What was Factory 798 like?
→ huge factory halls of bricks
→ small round windows that remind you of ships
→ bent roofs
→ 20-foot high walls of glass
More questions on the screen to guide the reading:
1. When was Factory 798 built? Who designed it? Who built it?
2. Why is it very different from Chinese architecture?
--- We’ve known that Factory 798 was built in 1950s. As time went by and things developed, what happened to it then?
→ no longer used/ needed
→ stood empty
--- What has happened to it now?
→ turned into an arts center
More questions:
3. How did Factory 798 turn into an arts center?
4. Why was Factory 798 welcomed by painters, music bands, artists and musicians?
Step 5. Listening and reading
--- Now, let’s listen to the tape and get a better understanding of the text. Please follow the tape in a low voice and pay attention to the pronunciation of the new words and phrases which you’re not sure of. At the same time, please try to find out the following new language points in the text and see how much you can understand them in English.
< Show the language points on the screen. >
1. pull down
2. stand
3. with… aid
4. remind … of
5. set aside
Step 6. Retelling
--- Now it’s time for you to read the text by yourselves and try to summarize the text. That is to say, suppose you are a journalist from CCTV 9 and you’ve just paid a visit to the famous Factory 798. Please make a TV program to introduce Factory 798 to our citizens in your own words. I’ll give you three minutes to read through the text by yourselves and get prepared for the retelling, OK?
Step 7. Discussion
--- In almost every city around the world, there are old buildings which are no longer used, such as schools, hospitals, factories or even churches. What do you think people should do with them? Why?
→To pull down the old buildings and set up new modern ones to keep up with the pace of the society.
→New uses should be given to old special buildings. It’s a great way to save the architecture from the past.
Step 8. Writing.
--- Since we all agree that giving the old special buildings new uses is a great way to save the architecture from the past, now it’s time for you to have a practice and show your ability. You know our school is moving to the new campus now and the old campus will be left empty then. Suppose you are young painters, artists, musicians, and you can rent some parts of the school building to practice. How do you want to change the school buildings? What new uses can be given to the old school buildings? Please work in groups and make a plan about it.
Step 9. Homework.
1. Finish the program about Factory 798 as a TV reporter.
2. Finish your plan about how to reuse our old school buildings.
In this unit you have learnt about art and architecture. How comfortable do you feel doing each of the skills below?
The things I can do Evaluation
I can understand and read about art and architecture. 5 4 3 2 1
I can describe buildings and works of art. 5 4 3 2 1
I can tell the differences between traditional architecture and modern architecture. 5 4 3 2 1
I can express my preferences in English. 5 4 3 2 1
I can draw and talk about floor plans of a building. 5 4 3 2 1
I can use the past participle as the object complement. 5 4 3 2 1
I can remember and use the new words and expressions in new situations. 5 4 3 2 1
篇9：英语教案－At the shop(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
Teaching Aims and demands
本单元通过学习马克吐温的《百万英镑》并改编成短剧形式的课文，学生能初步了解作者的风格。学生应能在教师的指导下，排演这个短剧。通过对话课的学习与操练，学生接触表示坚持个人意见的常用语句，并要求学生运用到实际会话中。学习并初步掌握as if和no matter引导让步状语从句的用法。
Teaching important and difficult points
1．单词
run, choice, note, change, fool, order, pleasant, right, assistant, customer, foolish, insist, tailor depend, favo(u)r , apologize, excited
2．词组
shop assistant, a clothes shop, give back, or else, change…for …, in the sun, try on, depend on, take place, get off, put on, drop in, once upon a time, do up, in fact, keep back, play the part of, next to
3．交际用语
There seems to be something wrong with it.
I would like you to change this blouse.
You sold me a blouse that I can’t use any more.
I am afraid I can’t do that right now.
Why can’t you do something about it?
Is anything the matter?
4．语法
学习as if和no matter的用法。
教学建议
课文建议
在Lesson 38课，建议教师应组织学生1）以节目的形式演出这段对话。2）教师可选取录像或多媒体形式完成此课的教学任务。3）教师把学生分成三人一组，适当准备一些道具排演本课的最后结局的短剧。4）教师要求学生找出能刻画服装店老板人物特征和心理变化的相关语句。如：There’s a customer, Tod, Will you serve him? / No matter what he is wearing , Tod, just show him the cheapest./Come, come. Get him his change, Tod..
对话分析
本单元对话是讲述在服装店调换衣服的经过，学生对其内容较易理解，但一些新单词的用法应掌握，如：customer, run, insist, change…for…。本课中也提供了给学生做相应对话的练习，如：A pair of trousers, A radio的口语练习。
教学重点难点
1.serve的用法
1)serve(sb.) as sth.表示“为（某人）工作，（尤指）当佣人”。
He served as a gardener and chauffeur.他做园艺工人兼司机。
2)serve还可表示“供职，服役”。
He has served his country well.他为国尽职。
3)serve sb. (with sth.). 表示“将（饭菜）端上桌。”
Four waiters served lunch for us.有四位服务员招待我们吃午饭。
4)serve 还可用于“（在商店等处）接待（顾客）或为顾客取货物”的意思中。
Are you being served?有售货员接待您吗？
He served some sweets to the children.他为孩子们拿来了他们想要的糖。
5)serve 还指“（一份饭）够……”。
This packet of soup serves two.这包汤料够两个人食用。
2.judge的用法
1)judge用作动词，表示作“断定，估计，认为”解。其后可带宾语从句，也可带不定式或形容词、名词等引导的宾补成分。
We judge that they have finished.我们估计他们已经干完了。
We judge them to have finished.我们估计他们已经干完了。
She judged him about fifty.她估计他在五十岁左右。
The committee judged it better to start the investigation at once.委员会认为最好立即开始此项调查。
From his letter, we judged his visit to China a great success.从他的来信判断他对中国的访问非常成功。
2)judge用作“判断，断定”解时，还可接wh-分句或wh-加不定式结构。
I can’t judge whether she was right or wrong.我不能断定她是对还是错。
3)judge还可表示“评判，评价”，可说judge sb. / sth.
Don’t judge a man by his looks.勿以貌取人。
4)Judging by / from…（从……来看，据……来判断）是惯用短语，可用来引导独立分句。
Judging from his looks ,he may be sick.从外表看，他或许生病了。
Judging by his accent, he must be from Guangdong.听口音，他准是个广东人。
3.get off的用法
1)get off意为“脱下”。
It’s rather hot today, we must get off the jacket.今天太热了，我们必须脱下夹克衫。
2)注意：get off还可作“下车”；“离开”；“出发”；“起飞”解。
As soon as I got off the bus, I started for the village on foot. 我一下公共汽车，就开始步行到村里去。
We must get off at once or we II be late我们必须马上走，否则要迟到了。
We got off immediately after breakfast.我们一吃过早饭就出发了。
The plane got off on time. 飞机准时起飞。
4．favor的用法
1）in favor (of )表示“赞成、主张”，常用作表语或后置定语。
The students were in favor of reform. 学生赞成改革。
2）do sb. a favor或do a favor for sb. 是个正式的礼貌用语，意思是 “给某人以恩惠，帮某人的忙”。
Would you do me a favor? 帮我一下好吗？
Do me a favor by turning off the radio. 帮我把收音机关掉。
Do me the favor to come. 务请光临。
注：do sb. a favor后接of doing 或不定式时，应将不定冠词a改为定冠词the。
5．put down的用法
1）意为“写下；记下”。
Put down your name and your telephone number.写下你的名字和电话号码。
Put this down in your notebook for future reference.这点记在你的笔记本上，以供今后参考。
2）可作“镇压；扑灭”。
The fire was finally put down by the firemen.大火最后终于被消防队员扑灭了。
6.as if的用法
as if 是连词词组，作“好像”、“好似”解，引导表语从句，用于下列句型中：
It looks/seems as if ....表示“看起来似乎……”。其中It为无人称代词，本身并无词义。looks / seems是连系动词，as if引出表语从句。
It looks as if it is going to show. 看来，要下雪。
It seemed as if the suit was made to his own measure. 这套衣服看来似乎是按尺寸给他定做的。
除此之处，as if也可以引导方式状语从句，修饰主句的谓语，此时从句中的谓语动词常用虚拟语气。关于这一点，暂可不必向学生交代。
The woman loves the children as if she were their mother.这个妇女爱这些孩子，她好像就是他们的妈妈一样。
7. no matter 的用法
no matter作“无论”、“不管”解，用以引导表示让步的状语从句，常用在下列句型中： 句型中的No matter what (who/when etc.)...分别表示“无论何事”、“无论何人”、“无论何时”等，这个从句可以置主句之前，也可以置主句之后。
由no matter + what等引导的让步状语从句。No matter后面接关系代词或关系副词引导状语从句在句中作让步状语。
No matter what you do, you must be very careful.不管做什么事，你都必须非常细心。
No matter之后可用what以外的关系代词或关系副词。例如：
No matter who you are (=Whoever you are), I’ll never let you in.无论你是谁，我绝不让你进去。
No matter which…无论哪一个……
No matter which you choose(=Whichever you choose), you will be satisfied.不论你选择哪一个，你都会满意的。
No matter where…无论何处；不管在哪里……
No matter where I go (=Wherever I go) , I will be thinking of you. 无论我到哪里，我都会想着你。
No matter when …无论何时，不管什么时候……
I’ll discuss it with you no matter when you like(=whenever like). 你什么时候高兴，我愿意同你讨论这件事。
No matter how..不管……如何；无论……多么……
No matter how hard you try(=However hard you try), you will never be successful. 不管你如何努力，你都不会成功的。
8．drop in, drop in on 与drop in at的区别
drop in 意为“顺便走访” He often drops in for tea. 他经常顺便来喝茶。
drop in on 后接人意为“顺便拜访某人”。
She dropped in on me yesterday.
drop in at后接表示地点的名词意为“顺便来（去）某处看看”。
Tom usually drops in at my place on his way home. 答题时要注意drop in后所接的名词表示的意思。
Jane used to ____ the tailor’s on her way home from work.
A. drop in B. drop in on C. drop in at D. drop at
詹妮以前常下班后去成衣店看看。the tailor’s 表示地点，故正确答案为C。
9．run的用法
1）表示“跑，奔跑，赛跑”。
The boy ran off as soon as we appeared.我们一来，孩子们都跑了。
She used to run when she was at college.在大学时她经常练跑步。
2）run还可表示“（火车、汽车、轮船等）往来行驶”
Buses to Oxford run every half hour.去牛津的公共汽车每半小时一班。
The trains don’t run on Christmas Day.圣诞节火车停驶。
3）run可用业表示“（液体）流动”。
Could you run me a hot bath?你给我放盆热水洗澡好吗？
Your nose is running.你又流鼻涕了。
4）run表示“（衣服上的染料或颜色）掉色，扩散”。
I’m afraid the color ran when I washed your new skirt.很遗憾， 我洗你那条新裙子的时候它掉色了。
5）run可表示“融化”。
It was so hot that the butter ran.天太热，黄油开始化了。
The wax began to run. 蜡开始融化了。
6）run还可表示“负责、经营、管理”。
He has no idea of how to run the successful business.他不知道把企业办好的方法。
Stop trying to run my life for me.我的生活用不着你来管。
10．Come, come. Get him his change. Tod. ( =Hurry up. Tod, Give the man his change.) 得了，得了，给他找钱吧，托德。
句中的come用作感叹语，表示“劝导”，“不耐烦”的情绪。come作感叹语用时，在不同的情况下，可以表示不同的感表，如“鼓励”、“惊异”、“命令”等。例如：
Come, come, Alice, you must be patient. 好了，爱丽丝，你得忍耐点。
本句中的change是不可数名词，作“零钱”，“找给的钱”解。又如：
Here is your change. 这是找给你的零钱。
change还可以用作及物动词，作“零钱”，“换钱”解。
Could you change a 10-yuon note, please? 你能换开10元钱吗？
教学设计方案Lesson 37
Teaching aims
1. Practise in pairs talking about buying clothes in a shop.
2. Study the language points in lesson 37.
Teaching procedures
StepⅠRevision
1. Check the homework exercises.
2. Revise articles of clothing by asking questions. Get as many as possible from the students and write them on the blackboard.
Questions for the teacher to ask the students:
1) What words have you learned about clothes ?
trousers, coat, jacket, shirt, overcoat……
2) What color do you like best if you buy a blouse ?
a gray one, red one, blue one, black one, yellow one, white one ……
Step Ⅱ Warming-up
Look at the picture on P 55.
1. Ask the students to say something about the picture. Let the students know a new word: blouse.
Answer: It’s a clothes shop. There are many clothes in the shop. Two women are talking now. They are talking about the white blouse and the red blouse in the shop.
2. Ask the students how different clothes are washed. Make a table on the blackboard if you like
as follows:
HOT WASH white cotton
WARM WASH coloured cotton
COLD WASH silk , wool
Step Ⅲ Listening and reading
Let the students listen to the dialogue once or twice and then answer same questions.
1. What did the customer buy last week?
… She bought, a blouse last weds
2. Whats wrong with the blouse?
… When doe washed the blouse, the color ran.
3. What did the customer ask the assistant to do?
…She asked the assistant to change the clothes or give the money back to her.
4. Did the assistant give the money back to the customer ? Why ?
…No, because the manager of the shop wasnt in. And the assistant couldnt decide whether to give it back to her or not.
Step Ⅳ Practice
Let students fill in the blanks of the dialogue.
SA: Good afternoon. Can I 1 you ?
C: Yea, please. I 2 this radio the day before yesterday. But there is something 3 with it. Last night it just couldnt. I 4 cant use it.
SA: Let me 5 . It scans as if it hasnt been 6 properly. Has it been left in the sun or__ 7_?
C: Of 8 not. How can I be 9 foolish ?
SA: 10 its the 11 of the factory that made it. I think I will send back to the 12 and get it repaired.
C: You may 13 it back to the factory, but I would like my money 14 .
SA: I’m 15 I cant do that.
C: Why cant you do 16 about it ? Id like you to change this 17 or else 18 me my money back.
SA: All right. You can 19 it for another one. Would you please 20 a look at these ones ?
Answers:
1. help 2. bought 3. wrong 4. work 5. see 6. used 7. rain 8. course 9. that 10. Maybe 11. fault 12. factory 13. send 14. back 15. afraid 16. something 17. radio18. give 19. change 20. have
Fill in the blanks.
1．这台收音机有问题吗？
Is there ______ _______ ________ the radio?
2．请把借我的书还我。
Please give me _______ the book that you _______from me.
3．天看上去要下雪了。
It _______ as if it’s going to_______.
4．他坚持要明天去那儿。
He _______ that he _______ there tomorrow.
5．别让孩子站在太阳底下。
Don’t _______ the child stand ________ the sun.
6．我想让汤姆的弟弟去做那项工作。
I would _______ Tom’s brother ________ do the work.
Answers
1. anything wrong with 2. back …borrowed 3. seems…snow 4. insists …go 5. have/ keep …in 6. like …to
StepⅤ Language points
Let students read the dialogue and ask them to pay attention to some key sentences and then the teacher gives some brief explanation.
1. There seem (s) to be…
2. like常见的句型是
like sb. to do sth./ like to do sth./ like doing sth.
3. I’m not that foolish =I am not so foolish.
4.It looks as if + 句子 =It seems as if + 句子
5. insist + that - clause + ( should ) + v
Step Ⅵ Further practise
1.Get good pairs of students to act out their dialogues in front of the class without their books if possible.
2. Provide a few situations for the Ss, let them practise the dialogues by dividing the different groups.
1)You have just bought a pair of shoes from a shoe shop. But later you find that the shoes are not of the same size. So you go to the shop again. Make a dialogue between the shop assistant and you.
2) You have just bought a tape-recorder. But it does not work as soon as you get home. So you go back to the shop and ask for a new one..
Step Ⅶ Exercise
Do exercises Ex 1--3. on Page 118.
A customer brought a blouse in a clothes shop last week. She found that the colours _____when she washed it. Thinking that there must be ______wrong with it, she went back to the shop. The shop_____ asked her whether she did not follow the ______and washed it in hot water. The ______said she was not ______foolish. It seemed that it was the ______of the company that produced it .The customer _______that the shop should give her money back, but the shop assistant refused. Finally the customer decided to change the blouse _______another one.
Key:
ran, something, assistant, instructions, customer, that (so), insisted, fault, for
StepⅧ Homework
1.Do exercises Ex 2--3. on Page 118.
2.Get the students to do the vocabulary preparation in Lesson 38 .
教学设计方案Lesson 38
Teaching Aims
1. Learn lesson 38 to get brief idea of the story.
2.The students are required to answer some questions.
Step I Revision
1）Check the homework exercises.
2）Oral practice.
1．你的手表有问题吗？ 2．我想让你去做这件事。
3．似乎看来这本书被他看完了。 4．我坚持让他把钱还我。
5．对不起，是我的错。 6．你为什么让他一直在田里工作。
Answers:
1. 1s there anything wrong with your watch?
2. I’d like you to do the work.
3. It seems as if the book has been finished reading by him.
4. I insisted that he (should) give me my money back.
5. Im sorry. Its my fault.
6. Why did you have him working in the fields?
StepⅡ Warm---up
Talk about Mark Twain.
1. What is Mark Twain?
Mark Twain is an American writer.
2. In our middle school text books. What articles were written by Mark Twain?
“Run for a Governor.” “A Million Pound Note”
Step Ⅲ Listening and talking
Today we are going to learn a dialogue, which is a part from A Million Pound Note. Listen to the tape and then talk about the pictures on P. 56 & P. 57.
Picture 1: A customer came into a tailors shop. The shop assistant looked at him up and down. From the clothes, the assistant thought he was a poor man.
Picture 2: After the tailor knew the man had one million pound note, he was very surprised. The manager measured him by himself. They changed their attitude to the man completely.
Step ⅣReading
Read the dialogue quickly and try to answer the questions.
1. What did the customer want?
2. How did the customer Tod?
3. What did the shop assistant show the customer?
4. How did the customer want to pay?
5. What made the manager fed excited?
6. What can we learn from the story?
Keys:
1.The customer wanted to buy a suit.
2.He looked poor. And his clothes were old.
3.He showed the customer the cheapest clothes
4.He wanted to pay with a large note.
5.The million pound note made the manager feel excited.
6.We should never judge a person by his clothes.
Step ⅤLanguage points
1.no matter + wh ---引导让步状语从句
2.Is anything the matter? 怎么回事？the matter =wrong
3. do sth. a favour =do a favour for do 帮某人一个忙；答应某人的要求
4.drop in on + 人/ drop in at + 地点
Step ⅥOral practise
Divide the Ss into a few groups to practise a play according to the text.
Step Ⅶ Exercise
Do Exercise 3 on Page 119
A customer went into a tailors shop to buy a new ______. All he had in his pocket was a million - pound ______. His wearies (衣服) were so worn - wit that the shop assistant looked ______ upon him and ______ him the cheapest clothes. In his mind, that was the best ______ for such a poor man.
When the customer ______ him the million - pound note, the shop assistant felt very ______ and didnt know what to do. Just then the manager went ______ to him and asked what was happening. Seeing the note, he got so _______ that he asked the customer to do him a ______ to get those cheap clothes ______ and ______on much better ones. Then he ______the gentleman and picked out nice _____for making a suit ______this mans own measure. The man said that he couldnt ______ the clothes unless they would wait or ______ the note. The manager promised to wait ______ his life. Finally, he told the assistant to ______ down the mans address. The gentleman said it was not necessary because he would drop ______ and leave his new address ______ he found another hotel.
Keys: suit; note; down; chose; choice; showed; surprised; up; exceed; favor, off; put; measured; material; to; order; change; all; put; in; when
Step Ⅷ Homework
1. Retell the story in your own words.
2.Prepare the next text.
探究活动
教师根据对话内容，可让学生设计买其它东西的场景，for example: You have just bought a recorder. But it does not work as soon as you get home. So you go back to the shop and you didn’t want it. 教师让学生自己进行复述发生的经过同时教师给学生提供部分的语句和提示：1）buy a recorder last week 2) It didn’t work 3) either change it or get money back 4)persuade you to change it for another one.
篇10：unit 2全单元教案3(人教版高二英语教案教学设计)
The Third Period
Teaching Aims:
1. Review the words appearing in the last two periods.
2. Learn and master the use of the Past Participle as Attribute and Predicative.
Teaching Important Points:
1. How to guess the missing verbs and use them correctly according to the given sentences.
2. How to tell a positive, negative and neutral from each other.3. Help the students master the Past Participle as Attribute and Predicative.
Teaching Difficult Point:
How to use the Past Participle correctly, especially how to use the Past Participle instead of the Attributive Clause.
Teaching Methods:
1. Practising to finish each task in World Study and Grammar.
2. Individual or pair work to make every student work in class.
Teaching Aids:
1. a projector
2. some pictures
3. the blackboard
Teaching Procedures:
Step I Greetings
Greet the whole class as usual.
Step Ⅱ Revision
T: In the last period, we've read a passage about reporters and newspapers. We've known that newspapers and other media do more than simply record what happens. Experienced editors and reporters make informed decision about what events to report, how to report them and why. Can you tell me the reason for them doing that?
Ss: Yes. Because they must make sure that readers can relate to the stories.
T: Right. Newspapers and other media play an important part in our daily life. Why?
Ss: Because they help us understand the world better on all sides.
T: Quite right. You've known about news media better than before. Besides, we've learnt some words in this unit. Have you really remembered and mastered them? I'll give you an exercise about them. Look at the screen and prepare for a while. Then we'll check the answers together.
Spell out the words according to the explanation for each word. The first letter of each word is given to you.1. f __ __ __ dismiss (an employee)from a job
2. s __ __ __ __ __ (cause sth. to) shift or change, esp, suddenly
3. r __ __ __ __ __ __ show the nature of or express (sth. )
4. t __ __ __ __ __ __ __ __ allow ( sth. that one dislikes or disagrees with) without interfering
5. e __ __ __ __to choose someone for an official position, usually by voting
6. i __ __ __ __ __ to harm or wound a person or an animal
7. p __ __ __ __ __ __ show or reveal sth. to sb. ;introduce(sb. ) formally; to give sth. to sb. ,often as part of official ceremony
8. r __ __ __ __ __ to have a connection with sth. Suggested answers:
1. fire 2. switch
3. reflect 4. tolerate
5. elect 6. injure
7. present 8. relate
T: OK. Now let's learn some other words on the screen.
(Teacher asks some students to pronounce each word and gives brief explanations. Then let the students read and remember them for a few minutes. )
Step Ⅲ Word Study
T: Well, now please open your books at Page 13. Let's have Language Study…Are you ready?
Ss: Yes.
T: Word Study first. Look at Exercise l in it: Complete the sentences with the verbs in the box. Change their forms if necessary. To do it better, first, you should read and understand each sentence. Then choose the proper verb and use its right form to complete each sentence. Are you clear?
Ss: Yes.
T: Prepare for a few minutes. Then I'll check your answers.
Suggested answers:
1. was elected 2. was injured
3. was fired 4. was switched
5. be tolerated 6. did…relate
7. is reflected 8. were…presented
T: Well done. Next, look at Exercise 2.There are some words in the box. Put them into three groups according to their meanings, positive, negative or neutral. First work in pairs, then I'll check your work.
Suggested answers:
positive: reliable, experienced, informed, talented, balanced
neutral: unique, printed, social
negative: nosy, careless, awful, addicted
Step IV Grammar
T: Well, now let's come to the part of Grammar. First, please look at the sentences from the text of the last period. Each of them has the Past Participle as Attribute or Predicative. Is that so?
Ss: Yes.
T: Now work in pairs to translate each sentence into Chinese and then tell if the Past Participle in it is used as At tribute or Predicative. A few minutes later, I'll check your answers. Are you clear?
Ss: Yes.
Suggested answers:
Attribute: experienced, informed, talented, organised, stolen, addicted, printed
Predicative: needed, respected, tolerated
T: Well done. Next, look at Exercise 2.Rewrite each past participle that is used as attribute with the attributive clause. Before doing it, you should study the given example carefully. First do it individually. Then check in pairs. At the end, I'll check your answers. You can begin now. Suggested answers:
informed decisions=decisions that are informed
talented journalists=journalists who were talented
an organised way = a way that is organised
stolen cultural relics= cultural relics that had been stolen
people addicted to drugs = people that/ who are addicted to drugs
printed articles= articles that are printed
(Then teacher asks the students to finish Exx. 3 and 4 as they do Exercise 2.)
Suggested answers:
Ex. 3: 1. The telegram sent by my sister brought the news of my dear grandma's death.
2. Let's try the bookstore opened last month.
3. Nine out of ten housewives interviewed about the product said they liked it.
4. Three guns, stolen from the police station, were found in the house.
5. I don't like to go to supermarkets crowded with shoppers.
Ex. 4:1. The three injured students were sent to hospital.
2. Some used textbooks were given to the students in the countryside.
3. Tom can't go to school because of his broken leg
4. The ground is covered with fallen leaves.
5. Many returned Chinese students overseas made a great contribution to our country.
T: Now, look at Exercise 5. Read the following news first. Then fill in the blanks with the correct form of the words in brackets. If you have any trouble in doing it, you can discuss you’re your partner. A few minutes later, I'll check your answers. You can begin now.
Suggested answers:
surprised, amazing, interested, boring, surprised, exciting, satisfied, interesting, disappointed
(Ss may make some mistakes, so teacher should give some explanations after correcting the mistakes made by the students.)
T: To do this exercise well, we should know how to use some words like interested/interesting, surprised / surprising correctly. To say how we feel about something, we can use the past participles interested, surprised, etc. To talk about the person or thing that makes us feel interested, surprised, etc. we use present participles. This kind of the past participles and the present participles is used like adjectives to refer to a state or a quality, not an action. For example, the story he told me is interesting, and I am interested in it. Can you understand?
Ss: Yes.
T: There are some other past participles like interested an surprising, you should remember.' They are excited, bored, worried, frightened, tired, astonished, delighted, satisfied, amazed, disappointed and so on. Most of them are used in the news of Exercise 5. You should read the news again after class to further study them. Do you remember?
Ss: Yes.
Step V Summary and Homework
T: Now, let's look at what we've learned in this period. First, we've revised and learned some words. Then we've learned the Past Participle as Attribute and Predicative. Mainly, we did some exercises to master them. Besides, we've learned some useful phrases, such as nine out of ten, look up to, fall in love with. (Write them on the Bb.)After class, you should do more exercises to consolidate what we've learnt in this period. And don't forget to preview what we'll learn in the next period. Are you clear?
Ss: Yes.
T: Class is over. See you tomorrow!
Ss : See you tomorrow !
Step VI The Design of the Writing on the Blackboard
Unit 2 News media
The Third Period
I .The Past Participle as Attribute and Predicative
a. a broken cup－The cup is broken,.
b. a polluted river-The river is polluted.
c. a fallen tree-The tree is fallen,
Ⅱ. Useful phrases:
nine out of ten(= nine in ten), look up to, fall in love with
Step Ⅶ Record after Teaching
篇11：高三英语教案学案一体化讲义Unit 2教师版(人教版高三英语上册教案教学设计)
城西中学高三英语备课组：凌红棋
TEACHING AIMS:
1. Learn and master the useful words and expressions in the period.
2. Train the students’ reading ability.
3. Help the students to know more about world records.
TEACHING IMPORTANT POINTS:
1. Master the following phrases and sentence pattern:
valuate, various, key, origin, equip, puzzle, wealthy, Asian, African, ambassador, wander, motherland, existence, navy, treasure, command, royal, embassy, zebra, volunteer, radium, dam, suggest, accomplish, sickness, unable, sacred, refer, aircraft, arise, evidence, chairman, praise, in the name of, in exchange for, set sail, in return, bring up, apart from, refer to, run out
2. Improve the students’ reading ability.
TEACHING DIFFICULT POINTS:
1. How to help the students understand the passage better. And how to help the students understand the sentence pattern and use it freely
2. It is well known that Africa had contacts with India and the Red Sea civilizations form the earliest times.
3. It was a major development that the Africans were reaching out to China.
4. The wonderful gift and the contact with the black court so excited China’s curiosity about Africa that Zheng He sent a message to the king and to other African states, inviting them to send ambassadors and open embassies in the new Ming capital, Beijing.
5. The exchange of goods had a symbolic meaning far more important than the value of the goods themselves.
6. All that was left to be conquered was the “third pole”, the highest mountain on earth, Mount Qomolangma, some suggested that it not be accomplished.
7. Climbing at such high altitudes requires great skill and is not without risk.
8. Apart from the cold, thin air and low oxygen levels can cause mountain sickness, which can kill.
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
9. They had no idea what they were up against and failed to reach the top.
10. The local Tibetans and Sherpas laughed at the strange bottles containing what they referred to as “English air”.
11. In later years the question arose who was the first in the team to reach the top.
12. When their oxygen ran out, they had no chance of surviving.
13. The New Zealander Edmund Hillary and the Sherpa Tenzing Norgay, as members of a British team, were the first to make it to the summit of Mount Qomolangma.
14. Tasman sailed past Australia without seeing the continent, but discovered Tasmania and the west coast of New Zealand, which he thought was part of the southern continent.
15. What he needed was a new pair of glasses because what he had seen were not people but penguins.
16. He was positive about the existence of a large unknown continent, and believed its northern coast to be lying somewhere in the Pacific Ocean.
17. Unable to find it, he decided to set sail for New Zealand, which had already been discovered by the Dutch.
Period 1. Word Study.
1. evaluate vt, evaluation c.n. 评价；估计
eg. The school has only been open for six months, so it’s hard to evaluate its success.
该学校刚开办了六个月，现在还很难估计它的成就。
2. various adj, variety n, a variety of, 各种各样的
3. in the name of 以…的名义, name sb./sth. after 以…的名字命名
eg. Animal experiments are carried on in the name of science.
一些残酷的动物实验是以科学的名义进行的。
4. equip v. (equipped, equipped) 配备； 装备
equipment u.n. 设备， 装备
equip sb./ sth. with sth. = supply sb./ sth. with 用…装备
equip sb. for使某人有能力胜任
sb. be equipped to do sth. 使某人有做准备做某事
eg. We’ll have to equip our office with word processors, won’t we?
我们公司应该备有文字处理机，不是吗？
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
We were just not equipped to deal with the problem.
我们没准备好，根本应付不了这个问题。
5. puzzle c.n. & vt.
c.n. 难题；迷
vt. 使困惑；使糊涂 puzzle sb
puzzled 感到困惑的 be puzzled about 对…感到困惑的
puzzling 令人感到困惑的
6. wealthy adj. 富有的，有财产的
wealth u.n. 富有，财产 her great wealth 她的巨额财产
a wealth of +u.n./c.n. 大量；丰富, a wealth of examples 大量事例
7. wander vi. & vt. 徘徊；流浪，广义用语，有信步而行之意
Beautiful deer wander all over this island.岛上有美丽的鹿儿游荡。
loiter 徘徊；闲荡；有逗留或徘徊不去之意
ramble 漫步，逍遥；指在海岸或林中等，有闲适之意
I ramble through the village.
我漫步穿过村庄
roam 徘徊；漂泊；指在陆海路较远的距离徘徊，不安定
My eyes roam over the sea and island.
我带着不安眺望大海和岛屿。
rove 漫游；漂泊；无一定目的，且范围较广
No lady would rove about the heath.
无一女士愿漫游此荒凉之地。
stroll 逍遥；散步；指在大街或园中悠闲而徐缓地信足散步。
He strolled out into the garden.
他信步出去进入花园。
range 徘徊；通常指具有目的的在较大的范围内徘徊，如在森林中寻找猎物等。
The wild beast ranges the forest in search of prey.
那野兽在森林中徘徊，寻找猎物。
8.accurate adj. 正确无误的；准确的
inaccurate adj. 不准确的
accuracy u.n. 准确性；精确性
eg. Is that station clock accurate?
9. arise vi. (arose, arisen) 出现，呈现，发生
arise from/out of 由…引起产生
eg. Some unexpected difficulties/opportunities have arisen. 出现了一些意外的困难。
A storm arose during the night. 夜间起风暴了。
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
10. royal adj. 王室的，皇家的
royalty n. 皇室成员
royalistic adj. 保皇党派的
royalism n. 君主主义
royalist n. 保皇主义者
11. bring up 培养，提出 呕出
bring about 带来，造成 bring about great changes 带来巨大变化
bring down 使倒下，使下降 bring down the price 降价
bring in 提出，引进，增加
bring on 引起，导致，有助于
bring out 使显现，阐明，出版
13. refer to
1) 参考，查阅 refer to the text 参照课文
2) 提及 Don’t refer to the matter again. 别再提这件事了。
3) 指…而言，指的是
When I said some people are stupid I wasn’t referring to you.
当我说有些人很笨的时候，我不是指你。
4) 适用于 This rule refers to everyone. 这条规则适用于任何人。
5) 把…称作 refer to sb./sth. as …
6) refer…to = owe …to 归功于
14. run out of = use up vt. 用完
run out vi.
eg. I have run out of /used up ink. = My ink is running out.
Period 2 Warming up, listening and speaking.
1. evaluate 评价，估计，估量，
1) It’s hard to __A__ her as a singer.
A. evaluate B. reduce C. achieve D. fade
2) It’s impossible to __B__ these results without knowing more about the research methods employed.
A. value B. evaluate C. absorb D. benefit
2. various vary, a great variety of,
1) 多方面的经验 various experience
2) He can’t complete his paper on time for __B__ reasons, which are true.
A. different B. various C. sort of D. kinds
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
3) A great variety of flowers __A__ on show in the street on National Day.
A. were B. was C. appeared D. had
3. take possession of 占领，占有，夺取，没收，
1) The policeman took possession of the thief’s bag. 没收
2) The soldiers took possession of the enemy’s fort. 夺取
3) have possession of 占领，拥有
4) be in (the) possession of 占领，拥有，（被…拥有）
5) be in one’s possession 在某人手中，由…掌握，
6) Almost everything __D___ the enemy after the war.
A. took possession of by B. took possession of
C. was taken possession by D. was taken possession of by
7) The house is __C__ Mr Wang.
A. taking possession of B. in possession of
C. in the possession of D. taking the possession of
4. in the name of 以…的名义，代表，凭借…的权威，
1) I arrest you in the name of the law. 以法律的名义
2) Let me thank you in the name of us all. 代表我们大家
3) a war waged in the name of liberation 借解放的名义
4) by name 用名字（叫） 5) by the name of 名收做…
6) call one names 骂人 7) under the name (of)以…为(笔)名
8) Have you ever heard of the pop group __B__ itself “Black Birds”?
A. called B. calling C. to call D. call
9) In old movies, the police shouted “Open up __A__ the law” before they broke the door down.
A. in the name of B. at the mercy of
C. by the name of D. regardless of
5. origin 起点，来源，出身，original,
1) the origin of civilization / human race …的起源
2) a man of noble / humble origin(s) 出身高贵/卑贱之人
3) Some Japanese words are of Chinese origin.
= Some Japanese words are Chinese 起源于中文
4) Her mother is French by origin. 原籍法国
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
6. equip equipment, equip…with…, be equipped with,
1) All cars nowadays are __D__ with safety belts.
A. prepared B. packed C. built in D. equipped
2) The boys __B__ themselves with food, tents and sleeping bags for their journey.
A. prepared for B. equipped C. afforded D. equaled
Period 3 Reading 1
1. Scanning the text to learn something about world records.
2. Fast and careful reading to get the detailed information in the text.
3. Individual, pair or group work to make every student work in class.
Step1 Scanning
Judge the following sentences True or False
1. The Europeans were the first Explorers to travel to other countries.
2. Accurate maps of the countries around the Indian Ocean were made before the fifteenth century.
3. In the years between 1405 and 1433, Zheng He sailed westwards only on voyages of exploration.
4. Zheng He invited African countries to send ambassadors to China.
Step 2
Read the passage and point out the topic sentence for each paragraph.
Para. 1 thesis sentence(论题) Many great explorers made expeditions across the Indian Ocean long before Columbus, among whom Zheng He was the most outstanding.
Para. 2 China had contacts with countries along the Indian Ocean from the early times, and during ancient time explorers had begun to contact with each other.
Para 3. Between the Han and the early Tang Dynasty, Swahili kingdom and the islands off the African coast developed into the world trade center and attracted merchants from the world.
教学随笔
be equipped to do sth,
supply sb with sth,
supply sth to sb,
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
(F) Brave merchant
______________________________
(F) no accurate maps
______________________________
(F) and trade
______________________________
(T)
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
Para. 4. During the Tang Dynasty, Du Huan, who traveled to many lands, wrote the book Record of My Travels.
Para. 5 In the 11th century the Africans made several voyages to the court of the Song Dynasty.
Para 6. By the beginning of the 15th century the time was ripe for a grand meeting.
Para 7. In the years between 1406 and 1433, under the command of Zheng He, seven large treasure fleets sailed westwards on voyages of trade and exploration.
Para 8. Zheng He renewed relations with the kingdom of the East African coast.
Para 9. The fleet made several expeditions before the exploration was stopped.
Multiple choice:
1. Who were (was) the earliest explorer(s) of the Western Ocean? __D__
A. Marco Polo B. Christopher Columbus
C. European explorers D. Brave merchants
2. Through the Silk Road, China got __A__ from other countries.
A. spices and glass B. silk C. weapons D. milk
3. An African king gave rhinoceros horns to China in order to __C___.
A. make money B. stop the war
C. show his friendship D. award the Ambassador
4. Which of the following became the world’s trading center over a few centuries after Han Dynasty? __C__
A. Ceylon. B. India.
C. Swanhili kingdoms. D. Egypt.
5. In Du Huan’s book “Record of My Travels” you can learn about __B__.
A. Marco Polo B. many foreign countries
C. Christopher Columbus D. ways to make silk
6. Who does “The Chinese Columbus” refer to?
A. The Ming emperor. B. Du Huan.
C. The Chinese ambassador. D. Zheng He.
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
7. The text is mainly about __D__.
A. how the Silk Road was formed
B. how China developed trading relations with Arabic countries
C. Zheng He’s expeditions across the Indian Ocean
D. the history of China’s opening to the outside world
8. The small bronze statue of a lion found in Shanga most probably came from __A__.
A. China B. Rome C. Greece D. London
9. “In the east, China prospered under a new dynasty.” The underlined part refers to __D__.
A. the Han Dynasty B. the Song Dynasty
C. the Qin Dynasty D. the Ming Dynasty
10. Which of the following can be inferred from the text?
A. Columbus’ exploration was stopped for economic reasons. __D__
B. No accurate maps of the countries around the Indian Ocean existed before Zheng He.
C. In the Ming Dynasty China had the most powerful navy in the world.
D. The giraffe was an animal that could not be found in China in the Ming Dynasty.
Step 3
Put the sentences in good order.
1. In the eleventh century, the Africans made several voyages to the court of the song dynasty.
2. Merchants from the Arabic countries began to travel to the Swahili kingdom and the islands off the African coast to trade with them.
3. People of the Han Dynasty exchanged silk for spices and glass with Indians and Romans by way of the Silk Road.
4. The Chinese traveller, Du Huan, wandered through Arabic countries for about 10 years.
5. Christopher Columbus and other European explorers searched for routes to Asia.
6. Zheng He made seven voyages and discovered the eastern coast of Africa.
Order: 3 2 4 1 6 5
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
Period 4 Reading 2
1. Trade and curiosity have often formed the foundation for mankind’s greatest endeavor. 贸易和好奇常构成人类最大努力的基础.
1) He endeavored to win votes for his proposal.
endeavor to do sth 比 try to do sth 语气更强
2. puzzle puzzlement, puzzling, puzzled,
1) No one has yet succeeded in explaining the puzzle of how life began. 成功诠释人类起源之迷
2) The murder case was a puzzle to the detective. 难题
3) That’s what puzzles me. v 使困惑
4) I’m puzzled (about) what to do next. 不知道，have no idea.
5) The situation was more puzzling than ever. 使人困惑的
6) 字迷 a word puzzle 文字游戏 a crossword puzzle
7) Facing the __A__ situation the sales manager looked ______.
A. puzzling, puzzled B. puzzling, puzzling
C. puzzled, puzzled D. puzzled, puzzling
8) On his face there was a __D__ expression which we couldn’t understand.
A. puzzle B. puzzles C. puzzling D. puzzled
3. However, long before that brave merchants were the real explorers of the Western Ocean. 然而, 在那之前很久, 勇敢的商人是真正的西洋探险者.
1) He’ll be back before long. soon
2) It won’t be long before you get well. 不久…就…
3) I had learned some English long before I came here. ____
4. in exchange for exchange sth for sth
1) I gave her a sweater __A__ a skirt.
A. in exchange for B. in exchange of
C. in return for D. in return of
2) I’d like to do something for you __C__ everything you’ve done for me.
A. in exchange B. in turn
C. in return for D. in terms of
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
lay the solid foundation of science fiction
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
比较：不久…就… / 过…多久才…
It wasn’t long before the war broke out.
It was two years before I saw her.
______________________________
conj 在我来这儿好久前
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
5. In 97 AD, Gan Ying, a Chinese ambassador, went to the East Roman Empire over land and returned to Luoyang with a present from an African king – rhinoceros horns. 公元, 汉朝大使甘英由陆路到达东罗马为帝国, 返回时带着一件非洲国王馈赠的礼物 – 犀牛角.
1) The water was over my knees. 淹没
2) She spread a clean cloth over the table. 铺在…上面
3) The horse jumped over the fence. 越过
4) I think he is well over fifty. 五十开外
5) I traveled (all) over Scotland this summer. 游遍
6) She has been ill in bed over the past week. 整个星期
7) They argued over money matters. 为…事
8) I heard the news over the radio. 从（广播，电视）
6. develop in to the world’s trading center 发展成了世界贸易中心 development, developed, developing
1) He believes that sports can develop mind and body. ____
2) He developed the little store into a big department store.
3) Land animals are thought to have developed from sea animals. 由…进化而来
4) She has developed into a beautiful woman. ________
7. The Arabic contacts to the African coast led to the next meeting between black people and a Chinese. 阿拉伯(国家)与非洲沿海的接触导致后来黑人与一位华人的会面.
1) The discovery of evidence led to __C__.
A. the thief having caught B. catch the thief
C. the thief being caught D. the thief to be caught
2) It is sleeping late in the morning that _D_ late for work.
A. devotes to being B. is led to being
C. leads to be D. leads to being
3) – Have you been in __B__ with Andrew recently?
-- Only by telephone.
A. communication B. contact C. connection D. link
8. wander 漫游，游荡，流浪
1) He was wandering about in the forest. 在森林中徘徊
2) I spent the vacation wandering through France. 漫游
3) He wandered off the subject. 他说得离了题。
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
over/during/in the past … 用于完成时
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
有益于身心发展
把…发展成为，be developed into
______________________________
______________________________
她出落得亭亭玉立。
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
wonder, wonderful,
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
9. It was a major development that the Africans were reaching out to China. 非洲向中国的延伸是一大进步。
1) Let’s keep to the point or we __A__ any decisions.
A. will never reach B. have never reached
C. never reach D. never reached
2) I keep the medicines on the top shelf, out of the children’s __B__.
A. reach B. hand C. hold D. place
10. date from date back to, 只用主动态及一般现在时
1) My interest in maths __A__ the time I met a good maths teacher in junior middle school.
A. dates from B. keeps from
C. is dated back to D. goes back to
2) These old buildings possibly __B__ the Ming Period.
A. are dated back to B. date from
C. are dated from D. date
11. existence exist, there exist(s), 区别：exit,
1) When did this world come into existence? 产生
2) Do you believe in the existence of ghosts? 相信鬼的存在
3) We can’t exist without food and water. 生存，live
12. no accurate maps of the countries around the Indian Ocean existed 没有环印度洋国家的标准地图 ________
1) 事件的正确报道 ______________________________
2) 正确地说 ____________________________________
3) He is accurate in his judgment (at figures). __________
13. In the east, China prospered under a new dynasty. 在东方，中国处于一个新朝代的繁荣时期。
1) 他的生意兴隆。 His business prospered.
2) 我听说他的儿子很有成就。
I hear his son is prospering.
3) When we are in England, China is an __D__ country.
A. east B. Easter C. eastward D. eastern
4) America faces the Atlantic __D__.
A. from the east B. in the east
C. to the east D. on the east
14. under the command of Zhen He, …
1) 在…的统治下 under the rule of
教学随笔
______________________________
reach/achieve one’s goal
______________________________
______________________________
within one’s reach
______________________________
______________________________
但：the building dating back to …
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
come into being
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
prosperous, prosperity,
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
2) 在…的领导下 under the leadership of
3) Nobody obeyed the teacher’s command to stop chatting.
4) The policeman commanded him to stop. 命令，order
5) The teacher commanded that he (should) go out. ______
15. set sail (to/from/for/…) _________________________
1) The scientific research team set sail for the South Pole.
2) It was four weeks’ sail from Shanghai to Japan in the past.
3) It’s only two hours’ ride from Datong to Beijing. ______
16. royal royalty, be loyal to
1) 王宫 a royal palace 2) 王室 a royal family
3) 王权 royal power 4) 英国皇家海军 the royal navy
5) 王冠 royal crown 6) 捷径 royal road, short cut
17. volunteer ___________________________________
1) The young man volunteered to stop the drunken men from fighting. 自告奋勇
2) I volunteered for his election campaign. __________
18. bring up 把…扶养成人，带来，呕吐，
1) Lily __D__ in a big city, while her twin sister Lucy was ______ in a small village by her grandmother.
A. grew up, grown up B. brought up, grown up
C. was grown up, brought up D. grew up, brought up
2) After Xiao Li arrived in London, she found it was far more difficult to __B__ living on her own.
A. rely on B. adjust to C. bring up D. look into
Period 5 Integrating Skills
1. suggest make a suggestion, a suggested answer,
1) The latest figures put forward by the state suggested that the business __A__ improving.
A. was B. be C. being D. should
2) Jane’s pale face suggested that she __B__ ill, and her parents suggested that she ______ a medical examination.
A. be, should have B. was, have
C. should be, had D. was, has
教学随笔
听从，服从，
______________________________
虚拟语气：should + 动词原形
______________________________
______________________________
驶向（目的地） for: 具体目的地，
to: 方向或目的地，
from: 起点
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
志愿为他的选举助一臂之力
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
suggest sth to sb,
suggest doing,
suggest (to sb) that … (should) …
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
3) He came to my class every week, but his attitude __D__ he was not really interested in the subject.
A. expressed B. described C. explained D. suggested
2. accomplish 成功地完成预期目标，任务，
finish 完成日常事务，了结，
achieve 排除困难完成宏伟计划或大业，
complete 完整地完成，终结，用法较正式，
1) We tried to settle the argument but accomplished nothing.
2) I finished reading the book yesterday.
3) By hard working we can achieved anything.
4) I need one more stamp before my collection is completed.
3. apart from …（别无），除…外（尚有），besides, except,
1) Good work, apart from a few slight faults. ________
2) Apart from being too large, the hat doesn’t suit me. ____
3) __D__ them, I had no one to talk to.
A. Take apart B. Set apart C. Fall apart D. Apart from
4) __D__ you and me, I don’t think there was anyone there under thirty.
A. Including B. Beside C. In addition D. Apart from
4. They had no idea what they were up against. 他们不知道他们面对的(困难)什么。
1) 他们面临大麻烦。They are up against a great trouble.
5. refer to _______________________________________
1) I don’t know who she was referring to when she said that.
2) There’re certain people to whom this order does not refer.
3) In the course of his speech, he referred several times to his notes. ________
4) He often referred to his past experiences as a peasant.
5) The Local Court decided to refer the case to the High Court. ________
6) He referred his success to the good education he had had.
7) When I said that some students were so lazy that they couldn’t hand in their exercise books, I __C__ to you.
A. didn’t refer B. hasn’t referred
C. wasn’t referring D. don’t refer
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
除一些小毛病外，活儿（工作）挺好的。
除太大外，这顶帽子也不适合我。
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
指…, 意思是指…,
适用于…,
看，参阅，
______________________________
提起过去当农民的经历，
______________________________
移交，
归结于，归功于，
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
8) – Please don’t take the books out of the reading room.
-- No, I won’t. I just want to _B_ them for some figures.
A. mention B. refer to C. look at D. look into
6. run out (of) run out vi, run out of, vt,
1) We are fast running out of cigarettes. ________
2) Can you give me a cigarette? Mine have run out. ______
7. arise vi, arose, arisen, 产生，出现，happen, appear,
rise vi, rose, risen, 升起，上涨，
raise vt, raised, raised, 举起，增加，筹集，…,
1) New difficulties will arise from such situation.
2) A problem has arisen with the new computer.
3) The curtain rose and the play began.
4) They raised the curtain and the play began.
5) The soldiers __D__ the flag every morning outside the barracks.
A. rise B. arouse C. arise D. raise
6) Her temperature is still __B__.
A. raising B. rising C. risen D. arising
7) Should the opportunity __C__, I’d love to go to Paris.
A. rise B. raise C. arise D. happen
8. praise prize, the Nobel Prize for physics
1) 热烈颂扬，唱赞歌 sing one’s/sb’s (own) praise
2) 把某人捧上了天 praise sb (up) to the skies,
3) 赞扬一个人的英勇 praise a man for his courage
4) Our guests praised the meal as the best they had had for years. 称赞…是…,
9. sacred 注意区分：secret,
1) 神圣的建筑物 a sacred building, 教堂，寺院，神殿，
2) 圣典 a sacred book 3) 宗教音乐 sacred music
4) 郑重的诺言 a sacred music
5) 林肯纪念碑 a monument sacred to the memory of Lincoln
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
我们的香烟很快就用完了。
抽完。
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
sing the praise of sb,
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
Unit 2 同步练习
一. 单项填空
1. He often think of he can do for his country.
A. what B. how C. that D. which
2. the cost, the hat doesn’t suit me.
A. Apart from B. Including
C. Without D. Together with
3. My money . I must go to the bank to draw some of my savings out before I’ve none in hand.
A. has run out B. is running out
C. has been run out D. is being run out
4. Finding a job in such a big company has always been his widest dreams.
A. under B. over C. above D. beyond
5. According to the weather forecast, which is usually , it will snow this afternoon.
A. accurate B. precise C. exact D. perfect
6. Many difficulties have as a result of the change over to a new type of fuel.
A. risen B. arisen C. raised D. arrived
7. - I want to buy a present for my friend’s birthday, but I’m not sure what to buy.
-Well, I think I can help you make a .
A. suggestion B. speech C. decision D. promise
8. The latest data put forward by the states suggested that the business improving.
A. was B. be C. being D. should
9. The best method to this goal is to unite as many sympathetic people as possible with the labor movement itself.
A. win B. accomplish C. finish D. complete
10. I shall have a companion in the house after all these years.
A. single B. only C. alone D. lonely
11. good, the food was soon sold out.
A. Tasted B. Being tasted
C. Tasting D. Having tasted
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
12. is no doubt that he will pass the exam.
A. There B. It C. This D. That
13. was known to all, William had broken his promise he would give us a rise.
A. As; which B. As; that
C. It; that D. It; which
14. It was about 600 years ago the first clock with a face and an hour was made.
A. that B. until C. before D. when
15. If you tomorrow, I treat you a big dinner.
A. are going to come; will B. were going to come; would
C. were to come; would D. will; would
16. In old movies, the police shouted “Open up ______ the law” before they broke the door down.
A. in the name of B. at the mercy of
C. by the name of D. regardless of
17. I warned them not to do it, but my objections were ______.
A. set sail B. set about C. set aside D. set down
18. Captain Cook commanded his men _____ into the sea.
A. jump B. jumped C. had jumped D. would jump
二．单词填空
1.As they lacked experience of how to teach the disabled children, the problems a_________ one after another.
2.What p________ the villagers most was that the footmarks in the snow were much larger than a human being’s.
3.Up to now , there has been no e________ to prove that he has sth to do with the theft.
4. Before the final exam, the teacher told all the students to e_____________ themselves with sharp pencils, pens, rules, and rubbers.
5. A___________ (各种各样的)of out-of-class activities are organized in that school for the purpose of building up students’ characters and forming their collective senses.
6. The Tongbai Mountain area is the ____________(源头)of the Huai River.
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
7. Anyway, your ____________(估计)of his potential turned out to be a failure.Now,he has become one of the best on our basketball team.
8. He quarreled with his wife and left his home. He did nothing but ____________(游荡)in the street.
9. He says that he will work as a _____________(志愿者) when the 29th Olympic Games are held in Beijing.
三．阅读理解
A
Lions are opportunists. They prefer to eat without having to do too much work. When resting in the shade, they are also watching the sky to see what is flying by, and even in the heat of the day they will suddenly start up and run a mile across the plains to find out what is going on. If another animal has made a kill, they will drive it off and take the dill for themselves. A grown lion can easily eat 60 pounds of meat at a single feeding. Often they eat until it seems painful for them to lie down.
The lionesses (母狮) , being thinner and faster, are better hunters (猎手) than the males (雄狮). But the males don’t mind. After the kill they move in and take the test share.
Most kills are made at night or just before daybreak. We have seen many, many daylight attempts but only ten kills. Roughly, It’s about twenty daytime attempts for one kill.
When lions are hiding for an attack by a water hole, they wait patiently and can charge at any second. The kill is the exciting moment in the day-to-day life of the lion, since these great animals spend most of their time, about 20 hours a day, sleeping and resting.
Lions are social cats, and when they are having a rest, they love to touch each other. After drinking at a water hole, a lioness rests her head on another’s back. When walking, young lions often touch faces with older ones, an act of close ties among members of the group.
64. By describing lions as “opportunists” in the first paragraph, the author means to say that lions .
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
A. are cruel animals B. are clever animals
C. like to take advantage of other animals
D. like to take every chance to eat
65. According to the text, which of the following is true?
A. Lions make most kills in the daytime.
B. Males care more about eating than active killing.
C. Lions are curious about things happening around them.
D. It doesn’t take lions too much time to make a kill.
66. How can we know that lions are social animals?
A. They depend on each other.
B. They look after each other well.
C. They readily share what they have.
D. They enjoy each other’s company.
67. What would be the best tiltle for the text?
A. Powerful Lions B. Lions at Work and Play
C. Lions, Social Cats D. Lions, Skilled Hunters
B
To extinguish (熄灭) different kinds of fires, several types of fire extinguishers have been invented. They must be ready for immediate use when fire breaks out. Most portable (手提式的) kinds operate for less than a minute, so they are useful only on small fires. The law requires ships, trains, buses and planes to carry extinguishers.
Since fuel, oxygen (氧气) and heat must be present in order for fire to exist, one or more of these things must be removed or reduced to extinguish a fire. If the heat is reduced by cooling the material below a certain temperature, the fire goes out. The cooling method is the most common way to put out a fire. Water is the best cooling material because it is low in cost and easy to get.
Another method of extinguishing fire is by cutting off the oxygen. This is usually done by covering the fire with sand, steam or some other things. A blanket may be used do cover a small fire.
A third method is called separation, which includes removing the fuel, or material easy to burn, from a fire, so that it can find no fuel.
The method that is used to put out a fire depends upon
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
the type of fire. Fires have been grouped in three classes. Fires in wood, paper, cloth and the like are called Class A fires. These materials usually help keep the fire on. Such fires can be stopped most readily by cooling with water.
68. If a fire breaks out on a bus, which of the follow should be ready there for you to use?
A. Sand B. Water C. A blanket. D. An extinguisher.
69. To cover a small piece of burning wood with a basin in order to stop the fire is an example of .
A. separating the fire B. reducing the heat
C. removing the fuel D. cutting off the oxygen
70. In choosing how to put out a fire, we should first be clear about .
A. when it breaks out B. how it comes about
C. what kind it is D. where it takes place
71. What would the author probably discuss in the paragraph that follows?
A. Another class of fires B. Another type of extinguishers
C. How fires break out. D. How fires can be prevented.
C
Childhood was an illusion (错觉) and the illusion was this: everything was bigger. No, I mean everything, not just houses and shops and grown-ups, but colors and flowers and journeys, especially journeys which seemed endless. “Are we there yet, Daddy?”
Funfairs (游乐场) were huge things that spread for miles around you with noise and lights and exciting danger. Rainy days at home when you were ill seemed to last for ever. Being a grown-up yourself was an unthinkable distant possibility. Every sound was louder, every game was grander, every pain unbearable.
As I’ve grown old, life has become smaller. Tastes have bulled. Surprises have lured into shocks. Days go by unnoticed. How can I regain childhood when it was an illusion?
I have only one repeatable and wonderful way and even in this way I can regain only part of that larger world. I can play upon the stage like a child and make the crowd laugh
教学随笔
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
______________________________
_____________________________
and laugh with them, sometimes helplessly like a child, and then, even though I’m a sixty-one-year-old man, I can almost catch the colors and sounds and stillness of those bigger years when I was little.
72. How does the author feel about his childhood?
A. It was endless. B. It was unpleasant.
C. He is glad that it is over. D. He misses it as a grown-up
73. The author thinks that everything was bigger in childhood because .
A. children could not make proper judgments.
B. children were curious and eager about life
C. things appeared really big in children’s eyes
D. to grow up seemed so long for children
74. The world seems to have become smaller to the author because .
A. life is disappointing B. time goes by too fast
C. he has had too many surprises
D. foods no longer taste delicious
75. The author enjoys playing on the stage so as to .
A. act like a child B. live an unusual life
C. make the crowd laugh D. regain his childhood
四．书面表达
假设你是李华，作为选派的交流学生在美国某中学学习了一年，寄住在Mr. Brown家里，刚回到国内。回国后你发现自己的一本英语词典遗忘在他家，因此给他写一封信，请他帮助寄回词典。信的主要内容如下：
1. 感谢在美国期间他所提供的帮助。
2. 一本英语词典忘记带回。
3. 词典是美国老师送的，非常珍贵。
4. 词典很可能丢在卧室的书架上。
5. 邮资自己付。
注意：
1. 词数100左右；信的开头和结尾已为你写好。
2. 可适当增加细节，以使行文连贯。
3. 参考词汇：邮资: postage
U2同步练习参考答案
一、单项选择
1-5. AABDA 6-10. BCBBD
11-15. CABAC 16-18 CCA
二、单词拼写
arose/appeared, puzzled,
evidence, equip, variety,
origin, evaluation, wander,
volunteer
三、阅读理解
64~75 CBDBDDCADBAD，
四、书面表达
One possible version ：
Dear Mr. Brown,
I’m now safely back home. Thank you very much for all the kindness I got from you during my stay. Hope everything is fine with you there.
Now I wonder whether I could ask you a favor. When I came back, I suddenly realized that I had left my English dictionary behind at your place. It is a precious gift from my American teacher. Would you please be so kind as to send it back to me? I’ll pay for the postage. The dictionary must be on the bookshelf in my bedroom. It is the one with a red cover.
Thanks and all the best.
Li Hua
篇12：unit 3 reading（北京十八中）(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
Period 2 Speaking
北京十八中 宋红靖
Type of lesson: Speaking
Contents: 1. Dialogue on P18
2.Useful expressions on preferences
3.Practice of the useful expressions
Teaching aims : Ss can use the expressions on preferences naturally and correctly.
Key point：Useful expressions on preferences
Teaching aids: computer & tape recorder
Teaching procedures:
Step 1: Warming up:
Show the Ss the following pictures to review what they’ve learnt in the previous lesson and lead in today’s topic------ talking about one’s preferences.
Q: 1. What are they?
2. Which do you prefer?
3. Why? (If the Ss can’t tell the reason , let them read the sample dialogue on P18 to help them .)
Step 2: Useful expressions:
Ss learn the expressions on P19 to enlarge the Ss’ vocabulary about preferences.
I’d rather…
I wouldn’t feel happy if …
I prefer something that…
I’m much more interested in …
I’m not very interested in …
I like seeing something …
In my opinion, …
I don’t get very excited about …
What I like is …
I really prefer …
If you ask me, then …
I can’t stand …
Step 3: Practice & Evaluation:
1. Show the Ss some sample dialogues with blanks for the Ss to fill in with
the suitable expressions above.
Example
1). (Betty came in, tired. Lisa said to her)
Lisa: We are going out to have a walk. What about you?
Betty: _______________________________. I am too tired. I need a rest.
2).----- What would you like to drink, coffee or tea?
------- Either is ok. But ____________________________.
3).------- What kind of music do you like?
------- _________________________.
--------What music don’t you like?
-------__________________________.
2. Give the Ss a situation with different topics and let them practice the dialogue in pairs, using proper expressions on preferences.
Practice:
Suppose you are shopping with your mother / friends / classmates and you have different opinions about clothes , books , pictures , food, …Make up a dialogue with your partner and tell each other what your preference is and why, using proper expressions you’ve learnt in this class.
Clothes Books
Food Pictures
3. When the Ss are acting their dialogue , the rest should listen carefully and take some notes and give them a proper evaluation.
When one group is reporting or acting, the listeners should do the following job.
Content/ topic Expressions used The reason (s)
Evaluation:
Score
Cooperation 5 4 3 2 1
Expressions learnt 5 4 3 2 1
Creative 5 4 3 2 1
Language 5 4 3 2 1
Logical 5 4 3 2 1
Step 4: Homework:
Talk about anything you like with your partner and try to use the expressions on preferences naturally and correctly.
★unit1-5 revision(人教版高二英语上册教案教学设计)
文档为doc格式
